WNY 210 157 PART 6

WNY 210 : Renovation Phase l - MIC Room, and 4th flr Hallway and Common Areas WNY 210 : Renovation Phase II - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas / WNY 157: Renovation Phase lII - Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas Washington Navy Yard, DC Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/27/2010

RFP WNY 210 157 Part_6.doc 7/27/2010 Page 1 of 3

PART 6 ATTACHMENTS

Part 6 contains attachments with information that will help the contractor develop a suitable design and construct without hindrance. Specifications:

o PART 2A o Exhibit 10A: SECNAV 5510.36 o Spec SECTION 260943.13 - DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS o Spec SECTION 22-00-00 - PLUMBING

– Design Sketches (Preliminary Renderings) provided for overall design intent,

see drawings for final layout and design: o Lobby (2), o MIC Room o Hallway o Authorized MSC Logo

– Product data (BOD):

o The manufacturers and numbers referenced are not intended to be proprietary. Approved equals will be accepted provided they are similar in quality, size and finish, and meet regulatory and LEED requirements.

– Item/materials BOD Product / Accessories BOD Manuf/Supplier/contact Flooring C&A Tandus carpets

• 24 x 24 Carpet tile • Backing: ECOFlex MODULAR • Terrazzo (Nurazzo – ¼ inch

gauge) 12 x 12 border (Marble M106- Cocoa Brown), 24 x 24 field (Crystal C504 - Black Diamond and/or C501 - Amber)

• Shaw carpets • Dale Tile • Nurazzo • Commercial Carpets of America • OR EQUAL

Wall panels/Base

• Woodworks Ekos • DIRTT Wall • Back painted panels • Velcro panels • Etched /graphic panels

• Armstrong • MOI • OR EQUAL

Suspended Ceiling systems and accessories

• Woodworks ceiling Canopies • 24 x 24 Tegular Wood veneer

panels • Axiom knife edge trim • 24 x 24 Cirrus beveled tegular

• Armstrong • OR EQUAL



Entrance mats Gridline LB frame • Construction Specialties • American Floor Mats, Inc • OR EQUAL

Restroom accessories

• Hand Dryer Xlerator 220V • Dyson Airblade

• Excel Dryer Inc • DYSON

Light fixtures • EDGE : WA-PP-EX4B, T Lamps • PUREX FX : 24’’ X 24’’ /T Lamps

• Prescolite: D6LED4-6D9LED350

K8MFC-WT

• Columbia Lighting: EPC22 -224G -DL-LUTRON; ECOSYSTEM BALLAST –F5830

• ALERA: PLK-122T5-CM48-OA-

LUTRON ECOSYSTEM BALLAST –MW-SGL-F5835

• LAM LIGHTING SYSTEM: SL20-2/39BX-DRA-CB-XX-FINISH VOLTAGE

• EST: 2200-DRS-4000-99M-062-DM-IN-SM1

• Prescolite: SDPS6LED4-35K-8-

277V-LUTRON 3D HILUME DIMMING

• ALBEO TECHNILOGIES: LS-B1_502DR0-DIM

• ELECTRIX LUMILEDGE: LLSR-

FR7 (40) / (16)

• Pinnacle Architectural lighting • LEDALITE / PHILLIPS

• LITECONTROL • Lutron : www.onesa.com

Furniture : CLR/finishes TBD

• KI Jury Base seating STYLE: Piretti Managerial – UPHOLSTERED

• High back swivel chairs w/ arms BOD: ADI Scorpio EXEC polished aluminum base and upper leather

• Elongated wood conference table for 14 w/ 3 recessed power pods (2 power/2 data ea)

• Low profile floor raceway: BOD -Connectrac system

• DYNAMIC BUSINESS INTERIORS, LLC • MOI • NELLO



Project Drawings: 1 Cover Sheet G1.012 Schedules G1.023 Wall Types and Door Types G1.034 Demo Plan/ Demo RCP - MIC A1.015 Floor Plan/ RCP - MIC A1.116 Closet Floor and Ceiling Plans A1.127 Finish Plan/FF&E Plan - MIC A1.218 Elevations - MIC A1.319 Elevations - MIC A1.32

10 Architectural Details - MIC Room A1.4111 Electrical - MIC Room A1.4212 New Plan - 210 Floor 1 A2.1113 New Plan - 210 Floor 2 A2.1214 New Plan - 210 Floor 3 A2.1315 New Plan - 210 Floor 4 A2.1416 Hallway Elevations - 210 Floor 1 A2.3117 Hallway Elevations - 210 Floor 2 A2.3218 Hallway Elevations - 210 Floor 3 A2.3319 Hallway Details 1 - 210 A2.4120 Hallway Detials 2 - 210 A2.4221 New Plan/RCP - 157 Floor 1 A3.1122 New Plan/RCP - 157 Floor 2 A3.1223 New Plan/RCP - 157 Floor 3 A3.1324 New Plan/RCP - 157 Floor 4 A3.1425 Hallway Elevations - 157 Floor 1 A3.3126 Hallway Elevations - 157 Floor 2 A3.3227 Hallway Elevations - 157 Floor 3 A3.3328 Hallway Elevations - 157 Floor 4 A3.3429 Restrooms 210 - Sheet 1 A4.0130 Restrooms 210 - Sheet 2 A4.0231 Restrooms 157 - Sheet 1 A4.0332 Restrooms 157 - Sheet 2 A4.0433 Restroom Details 157/210 A4.4134 Mechanical Demo/ Existing - MIC M1.0135 Mechanical Plan - MIC M1.1136 Mechanical Plan - 210 Floor 1 M2.1137 Mechanical Plan - 210 Floor 2 M2.1238 Mechanical Plan - 210 Floor 3 M2.1339 Mechanical Plan - 210 Floor 4 M2.1440 Mechanical Plan - 157 Floor 1 M3.1141 Mechanical Plan - 157 Floor 2 M3.1242 Mechanical Plan - 157 Floor 3 M3.1343 Mechanical Plan - 157 Floor 4 M3.1444 Mechanical Specs M3.4145 Mechanical Details M3.4246 Plumbing - 210 Sheet 1 P4.0147 Plumbing - 210 Sheet 2 P4.0248 Plumbing - 210 Schedules P4.0349 Plumbing - 157 Sheet 1 P4.0450 Plumbing - 157 Sheet 2 P4.0551 Plumbing - 157 Schedules P4.06

WNY 210 : Phase l - Renovation MIC Room, and 4th flr Hallway and Common Areas WNY 210: Renovation Phase II - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas WNY 157: Renovation Phase lII - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas Washington Navy Yard, DC Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 1 of 5

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A Project-Specific General Requirements

The following requirements supplement those contained in the body of Part 2, General Requirements, for Small Projects. Paragraph numbers in Part 2 correspond to paragraph numbers used in Part 2, Attachment A.

Paragraph 3 POST AWARD KICKOFF MEETING (PAK) CPM to provide after contract is awarded.

Paragraph 4 DESIGN

Submit design drawings or sketches, calculations and manufacturer’s data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. The Contractor is encouraged to prepare design drawings more like shop drawings to minimize construction submittals.

Provide hard 3 copies of design submittal package to the following reviewers 1 week prior to the in-progress review meeting:

Deliverable/submittals FEAD/ PWD

Architect Client MSC

Final Design Development

Half-size Drawings or Sketches 3 1

Specifications and Manufacturer’s Cut Sheets/LEED supporting docs

3 1

FF&E Lead time/Design/Construction Schedule

3 1

Budget Management Status/Cost Estimate

2 1

Energy Calculations/LEED 2 1

PROD Form (Permits) 2 1

Finish Samples 2 3

1. Submittal packages will be considered for Government review and approval during the Post Award Kick-off Meeting. The following design submittals must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction:

a. Electrical design: wiring diagrams and associated panels b. HVAC upgrades and redistribution

c. Plumbing and new restroom reconfigurations



2. Construction submittals are to be Contractor-approved, except those listed below:

a. DOR Approval required for: 1) Fire Protection related submittals 2) All components of the interior doors, hardware, cabinets, fireproofing/firestopping,

railings, paint, finish materials/colors. 3) HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and balancing. 4) Furnishings, fixtures, and equipment packages 5) Flooring materials and installation schedules 6) Wall panel system and associated accessories 7) Suspended Ceiling systems and associated accessories 8) Plumbing, new restroom reconfigurations and accessories

b. Government Approval required for: 1) Telecommunications 2) SPAWAR: security 3) JPAS: Joint personnel adjudication system 4) Digital Lighting Network Controls System

3. Submit the following construction submittals, approved by the DOR, to the Government for surveillance:

a. Submit fire protection related submittals pertaining to spray-applied fire proofing and fire stopping, exterior fire alarm reporting systems, interior fire alarm & detection systems, and fire suppression systems including fire pumps and standpipe systems.

b. Submit HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing required submittals. c. Submit telecommunications shop drawings for coordination with the NMCI / VTC

Contractors. d. Submit Performance Verification and Acceptance Testing required by LEED, IBC or

this RFP. e. Submit Final LEED Certification Documentation for US Green Building Council

Certification. f. Submit electrical wiring diagrams pertaining to HVAC and lighting systems used to

make up the Reflected Ceiling Plan system for each floor in each bldg.

Paragraph 5 FIRE PROTECTION AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS All work performed on means of egress, fire rated elements, Fire Suppression, Mass Notification, and Fire Alarm Systems shall be reviewed, inspected and approved by Government’s FPE for WNY.

1. Area of Responsibility: Examples include, but are not limited to, water distribution systems including fire pumps and fire hydrants, fire resistive assemblies such as spray-applied fire proofing of structural components and fire rated walls/partitions, mass notification, fire alarm and detection systems, fire suppression and standpipe systems, means of egress components, and emergency and exit lighting fixtures. Related submittals shall be forwarded to the Government FPE prior to starting work for that item.

1. Construction Surveillance: Government’s FPE shall visit the construction site as necessary to ensure life safety and fire protection systems are maintained and/or reinstalled in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Frequency and duration of the field visits are dependent upon particular system components, system complexity, and phase of



construction. At a minimum, field visits shall occur just prior to installation of suspended ceiling system to inspect the integrity of passive fire protection features and fire suppression system piping, preliminary inspections of mass notification, fire alarm/detection and suppression systems, and final acceptance testing of mass notification, fire alarm/detection and suppression systems.

a. Preliminary and Final Inspections and Acceptance Testing: Government’s FPE

b. Final Life Safety/Fire Protection Certification Documentation: The Contractor shall coordinate with Government’s FPE for written certification that all life safety and fire protection features and systems have been installed in accordance with applicable criteria and manufacturer's requirements. This certification shall summarize all life safety and fire protection features considered.

shall personally witness all preliminary inspections and testing of mass notification, fire alarm/detection and suppression systems. Once preliminary inspections and testing have been successfully completed, the Government’s FPE shall certify to the QC Manager that systems are fully compliant and ready for final inspection and acceptance testing. The QC Manager shall provide 14 days advance notice to the Contracting Officer to schedule the final inspection and acceptance testing with the activity Fire Inspection Office and the NAVFAC Fire Protection Engineer.

Paragraph 6 QUALITY CONTROL

Paragraph 7 SUBMITTAL PROCESSING

SUBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED STATUS 1 Quality Control Plan

2 Material Safety Data Sheets 3 Design/Construction

Schedule

4 Waste Management Plan 5 Safety and Health Plan 6 Schedule of Prices

7 Budget Management Summary

8 Record Drawings

9

Operation and Maintenance Information

10 Licenses and Permits

11 Badge Requests

12 Statement of Acknowledgement SF 1413

13 Demolition and Work Plan



Paragraph 8 SUPERVISION: Fluent in English and other language as necessary to be able to communicate with employees.

Paragraph 10 BUDGET MANAGEMENT This project requires a Budget Management System be developed and maintained. The Budget Management System shall represent major portions of the work such as HVAC, site work, and exterior skin. The purpose of budget management is to balance scope and value during critical project design decisions. Update the budget management status at regular intervals during design, at a minimum with design submittals, for review by and discussion with the COR. The final budget management summary shall correspond with the final Schedule of Prices.

Paragraph 14 SCHEDULE OF PRICES (values): To be provided to PM by contractor before start of construction.

Paragraph 15 INVOICES: WAWF system - coordinate with Contract specialist.

Paragraph 19 CONTRACTOR WORK SITE: Lay down areas for staging to be coordinated w/ Government Construction Manager at kick off meeting. Probable location: alley area between WNY 210 and WNY 157.

Paragraph 20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES Backflow preventers shall have a certificate of full approval from FCCCHR-USC, University of Southern California, attesting that the design, size, and make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.

SUBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED STATUS

14 Design Development Docs

15 Final Design Docs

16 Submittal Register

17 Waste Management Opportunity Assessment Form

18 Performance/Payment Bonds

19 Environmental Protection Plan

20 Certificates of Insurance

21 DD Form 1354



Paragraph 21 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS AND PROTECTION The Contractor is required to complete and submit evidence of completion of the Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking (ECATTS) program. For more detailed information on ECATTS see UFGS 01 57 19.00 20.

Paragraph 22 WASTE MANAGEMENT An Opportunity Assessment Form is required for this project as part of the Waste Management Plan. Address waste reduction, recycling and salvage and include in Waste Management Plan.

Paragraph 23 RECORD DRAWINGS AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA Provide the Contracting Officer with two copies of half size as-built drawings, and two CDs containing drawings (in both pdf and Autocad 2006 formats) and all construction submittals.

Paragraph 24 WARRANTY: Provide copy of warranties with submittals and OPMs.

Paragraph 25 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS To be discussed with Contract specialist or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830 .

Paragraph 26 WORK HOURS, ACCESS AND PASSES Work schedule can be coordinated in 3 shifts (24 operation) with the proper JPAS. Schedule to

be discussed with RFP.

Paragraph 27 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS JPAS: Joint Personnel Adjudication System. Contact (PWD) Dave Crouse in PWD 202-685-8256 for forms and documentation submittal. Contact Mr. William Johnson @ MSC (Military Sealift Command) 202-685-5145 for security status or information.

Paragraph 28 REQUIRED INSURANCE Contact Contract specialist Lou Ann Demoske at 202-685-0848 or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830.

Paragraph 30 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Contact contract specialist or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830 .

Paragraph 34 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH The DOR is required to edit and submit UFGS 01 35 29, Safety and Occupational Health Requirements.

Safety and Health Officer (SSHO): The Site Safety and Health Officer may serve also as the Superintendent.

a. Hot Work: To be addressed at the project kick-off meeting.

b. Pre-Outage Coordination Meeting: To be addressed at the project kick off meeting.

**End of PART 2 Attachment A**

SECNAV M-5510.36 June 2006

10A-1

EXHIBIT 10A

VAULT AND SECURE ROOM (OPEN STORAGE AREA) CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1. VAULT a. Floor and Walls. Eight inches of reinforced-concrete to meet current structural standards. Walls are to extend to the underside of the roof slab. b. Roof. Monolithic reinforced-concrete slab of thickness to be determined by structural requirements, but not less than the floors and walls. c. Ceiling. The roof or ceiling shall be reinforced-concrete of a thickness to be determined by structural requirements, but not less than the floors and walls. d. Door. Vault door and frame unit shall conform to Federal Specification AA-D-600, Class 5 vault door. Doors shall be equipped with a built-in GSA-approved combination lock meeting Federal Specification FF-L-2740. 2. SECURE ROOM a. Walls, Floor, and Roof. The walls, floor, and roof construction shall be of permanent construction materials; i.e. plaster, gypsum wallboard, metal panels, hardboard, wood, plywood, or other materials offering resistance to, and evidence of unauthorized entry into the area. Walls shall be extended to the true ceiling with permanent construction materials, wire mesh, or 18-gauge expanded steel screen. b. Ceiling. The ceiling shall be constructed of plaster, gypsum, wallboard material, hardwood, or any other acceptable material. c. Doors. The access door to the room shall be substantially constructed of wood, metal, or other solid material and be equipped with a built-in GSA-approved combination lock meeting Federal Specification FF-L-2740. For open storage areas approved under previous standards, the lock may be the previously approved GSA combination lock until the door has been retrofitted with a lock meeting Federal Specification FF-L-2740. When double doors are used, an astragal will be installed on the active leaf of the door. The hinge pins of outswing doors shall be peened, brazed, or spot welded to prevent removal. Doors other than the access door shall be secured from the inside (for example, by a dead bolt lock, panic dead bolt lock, or rigid wood or metal bar which

SECNAV M-5510.36 June 2006

10A-2

extends across the width of the door, or by any other means that will prevent entry from the outside. Key operated locks that can be accessed from the exterior side of the door are not authorized. Each perimeter door shall be protected by a balanced magnetic switch that meets the standards of UL 634. d. Windows. All windows which might reasonably afford visual observation of classified activities within the facility shall be made opaque or equipped with blinds, drapes, or other coverings. Windows at ground level will be constructed from or covered with materials which provide protection from forced entry. The protection provided to the windows need be no stronger than the strength of the contiguous walls. Open storage areas which are located within a controlled compound or equivalent may eliminate the requirement for forced entry protection if the windows are made inoperable either by permanently sealing them or equipping them on the inside with a locking mechanism and they are covered by an IDS either independently or by the motion detection sensors in the space. e. Openings. Utility openings such as ducts and vents shall be kept at less than man-passable (96 square inches) opening. Openings larger than 96 square inches shall be hardened per the Military Handbook 1013/1A.

__________________________________________________________________________________________ DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS 6/10/10

260943.13 - 1

SECTION 260943.13 DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Digital-Network Lighting Control System. 2. Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts. 3. Motorized Shades:

a. Motorized interior privacy and room darkening roller shades.

B. Related Sections: 1. Rough Carpentry: Blocking for support of window shade brackets and pocket assemblies. 2. Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board substrate for window shade systems. 3. Acoustical Ceilings: Shade pockets, pocket closures, and accessories. 4. Addressable Fixture Lighting Control: Digital Electronic Dimming components and ballast

module interfaces. 5. Lighting Control Devices: Occupancy sensors. 6. Lighting Control Panel Boards: Lighting panels (switching) controlled by Digital Network Lighting

Control System. 7. Modular Dimming Controls 8. Wiring Devices: Receptacles 9. Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts: Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts. 10. Integrated Automation: Building integrator shall provide integration of the lighting control system

with Building Automation Systems. 11. Audio-Video Systems: Connections to audio/visual equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) ; C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics

Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight. 2. G21-96 (2002) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials

to Fungi. 3. G22-76 (1996) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.

C. International Electrotechnical Commission. 1. (IEC) 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Testing Standard. 2. IEC/EN 60669-2-1 switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations - electronic

switches. 3. IEC/EN 55014-1 (2000) - Emission Test for Electrical Motor-Operated and Thermal Appliances

for Household and Similar Purposes, Electrical Tools and Similar Electrical Apparatus. 4. IEC/EN 61000-3-2 (2000) - Limits for Harmonic Currents Emissions. 5. IEC/EN 61000-3-3 (1995) - Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker. 6. IEC/EN 55014-2 (1997) - Immunity Test for Household Appliances Electrical Tools and Similar


260943.13 - 2

Electrical Appliances. 7. IEC/EN 60335-1 (2004) - Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - General Requirements. 8. IEC/EN 60335-2-97 (2002) - Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - Particular

Requirements for Drives for Roller Shutters, Awnings, Blinds, and Similar Equipment.

D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO); 9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. WD6 – Dimensional Specifications. 3. Ballast standards

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 94 – Flammability Rating 2. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures. 3. UL498 – Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 4. 508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 5. UL514C – Standard for Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and Covers. 6. 916 – Energy Management Equipment. 7. 924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 8. 935 (2005) - Fluorescent Ballasts 9. 1310 – Class 2 Power Units. 10. 1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls.

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (2004) - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Digital Network Lighting Control System includes computer-based software that provides control, configuration, monitoring, alerting and reports. System includes: 1. Lighting Management Panel 2. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager - light management computer 3. Light management computer software. 4. Energy savings display software 5. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels, power interfaces and power modules 6. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces and sensors 7. Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts

a. 3-Wire (Line Voltage Controlled) Dimming Ballasts b. Digital (Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Ballasts

8. Addressable fixture lighting control components and ballast module interfaces 9. Window treatments 10. Open Loop Solar Adaptive Shade Algorithm 11. Permanently installed occupancy/vacancy sensors and power packs

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Part 6:

B. Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment:


260943.13 - 3

1. Meets specification exactly as stated.

C. Shop Drawings; include: 1. Schematic (one-line diagram) of system.

D. Samples: 1. Samples showing available color and finish selections for controls.

E. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.

F. Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide functionality is described.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of lighting management systems. 2. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of precision-engineered, low-voltage

motorized shading systems. 3. Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including in-house

engineering for product design activities. 4. Assign responsibility for design, engineering, installation, and performance of window shade

system to single manufacturer and their qualified dealers and installers. 5. Furnish shading system and electrical control equipment for complete installation and single

source responsibility of shading and lighting control. 6. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in

accordance with warranty.

B. Lighting control system components: 1. Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance upon request.

C. Window Shade Installer Qualifications: 1. Qualified to install and start-up specified products by prior factory training, experience,

demonstrated performance, and acceptance of any requirement of the manufacturer, subsidiary of the manufacturer, or licensed agent.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Include installation, programming, and maintenance instructions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: 1. Ambient temperature:

a. Lighting Control System and Window Shades: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F).

b. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager, system computer: 10 degrees to 35 degrees C (50 degrees to 90 degrees F)

c. Fluorescent dimming ballasts: 10 degrees to 60 degrees C (50 degrees to 140 degrees F) 2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.


260943.13 - 4

3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.

B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate pre-wiring of system utilizing manufacturer’s approved low voltage wiring to each shade drive location.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s Enhanced 8 Year Limited Warranty: 1. 8-year limited parts warranty for the replacement of defective Digital-Network Lighting

Components from the date of system startup completion. 2. 2-year Silver Level Support and Maintenance Plan that covers 100 percent parts and labor from

the date of the system startup completion.

B. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager is covered by a 1-year parts and labor warranty.

C. Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering 5 years with factory startup on ballasts and ballast modules from date of purchase.]Retain paragraph below if Shades will be included to meet project requirements. Edit to coordinate with other sections in the Project Manual.

D. Provide manufacturer’s 2 year parts and labor and 8 years limited parts warranty for defective shade equipment.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to end-user, qualified dealer or installer.

B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of 10 years from date of manufacture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Lighting Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

B. Designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when subjected to discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2.

2.2 DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the component manufacturer's maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded conditions in 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature.

B. Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): The component’s maximum current rating to be at least two times the dimmer’s/relay’s rated operating current.

C. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without impacting


260943.13 - 5

lifetime of dimmer/relay.

D. Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to performance. 1. Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to surges of

6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and per IEC 61000-4-5 surge requirements. 2. Other power handling devices: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when

subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.

E. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.

F. Power failure memory and dimmer/relay recovery: 1. When power is interrupted and subsequently returned, within 3 seconds lights will automatically

return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power interruption.

G. Dimmers: 1. Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations including

changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS voltage/cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.

2. Systems not providing cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.

3. Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.

4. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible steps are not acceptable.

5. Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve for the specific light source.

6. Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field. 7. Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on circuit-by-circuit basis. 8. Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements:

a. Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) transformer: 1) Contain circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to input

of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472, Section 5.11. 2) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to include DC

current protection in the event of a single device failure. b. Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer:

1) Dimmer to operate electronic low voltage transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.

c. Neon and cold cathode transformers: 1) Magnetic transformers: UL listed for use with normal (low) power factor magnetic

transformers.Electronic transformers: Must be supported by the ballast equipment manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being provided.

9. Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements: a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable of

being electronically linked to single zone. b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:

1) 0-10V analog voltage signal. a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. b) Sink current via IEC 60929. c) Source current.

2) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal. 3) DSI digital communication.


260943.13 - 6

4) DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929: a) Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929. b) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.

5) PWM IEC 60929.

H. Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements: 1. Rated life of relay at full load: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles. 2. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to

and removed from load circuits. 3. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

2.3 POWER PANELS

A. Mechanical: 1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment. 2. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel. 3. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer assemblies or other

components. 4. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means. 5. Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar inserted

between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

B. Electrical: 1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated

feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements:

a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. b. Contain visual trip indicator; rated at [10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming/Switching], [14,000 AIC,

277 V Dimming], [18,000 AIC, 277 V Switching]. Field verify with client at MSC. c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature protection.

Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of panel.

d. Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing loads.

e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other components in panel.UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers.

3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of [25,000A] [45,000A] [65,000A]. Field verify.

C. Architectural Lighting Control Panel: 1. Dimmers designed and tested to specifically control incandescent/tungsten, magnetic low

voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent dimming ballasts, and non-dim loads.

2. Utilize universal 16A continuous-use UL listed dimmer. 3. Utilize multiple load type low voltage dimming module. 4. Limit current rise time to minimum 350 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current

waveform and minimum 525 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle. Current rise to be minimum


260943.13 - 7

400 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current waveform and minimum 600 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.

5. Load faults only affect the given circuit.

D. Light Duty Commercial Lighting Control Panel: 1. Surface mounted 2. Utilize multiple load type 16A feed continuous-use UL listed dimming/switching modules. 3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relay. 4. Utilize multiple load type low voltage dimming module.

E. Switching Panels: 1. Surface mounted. 2. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles. 3. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to

and removed from load circuits. 4. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

F. Panel Processor: 1. Provide following capabilities:

a. Operate circuits directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide feedback of system operation.

b. Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system. c. Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting levels.

2. Where indicated on Drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit to be capable of transferring control based on independent programming between architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990 or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.

3. React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.

G. Diagnostics and Service: 1. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor. 2. Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LEDs to verify proper operation and assist in system

troubleshooting. 3. Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that

minimizes loss of control for occupant. a. If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor provides

local control of lights until system is repaired. b. If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be used to

turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights until panel processor is repaired.

c. If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.

2.4 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS

A. General 1. Ten-year operational life while operating with a case temperature range of 10 degrees C (50

degrees F) to 75 degrees C (167 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. 2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without impairmentper

IEC 801-2. 3. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s maximum


260943.13 - 8

temperature rating when the ballast is under fully-loaded conditions and case temperature is 75 degrees C (167 degrees F).

4. Programmed Rapid Start Type. 5. Maximum inrush current of 7 amperes for 120V ballasts and 3 amperes for 277V ballasts. 6. Current crest factor (CCF) less than 1.7. 7. Meet ANSI C82.11 High frequency ballast standard. 8. Will not interfere with infrared devices operating at frequencies between 38 kHz and 42 kHz. 9. Withstand up to a 6,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI

C62.41 Category A. 10. Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD

S20.20. 11. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient. 12. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input. 13. Total Harmonic Distortion less than [10 percent] [20 percent] and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum

allowable THD requirements 14. Actively prevent overheating in T5-HO linear fluorescent lamp applications. 15. Ballasts to track evenly across:

a. Multiple lamp lengths. b. All light levels.

B. 3-Wire Control 1. Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 10 percent relative light output. 2. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast failure in the event of a mis-wire.

C. Digital Control 1. Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 10 percent relative light output. 2. Monitor and report lamp and ballast status. 3. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption. 4. Each ballast responds independently to:

a. Up to 32 occupant sensors. b. Up to 64 personal control inputs. c. 2 daylight sensors.

5. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on ballast cover. 6. Averages 2 independent daylight harvesting inputs internally. 7. Responds to digital load shed command.

a. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command. 1) Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is

received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent.

8. Digital Electronic Dimming Ballasts a. Connect without interface to:

1) Occupant sensor (motion detector). 2) Daylight sensor. 3) Personal control input (keypad or infrared receiver).

b. Provide a 20VDC source to power connected sensors. c. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the

digital bus.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE


260943.13 - 9

A. Switching Lighting Control Module: 1. Mechanical:

a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment. b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel. c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

2. Surface mounted 3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A. 4. Switching:

a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles. b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits. c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads. d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 16

amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold cathode and motor loads).

5. Connection without interface to wired: a. Occupancy sensors b. Daylight sensors c. IR receivers for personal control

6. Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485. 7. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and IR

receivers. 8. Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats. 9. Contact Closure Input

a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state output without interface to: 1) Activate scenes 2) Enable or disable time clock

10. Emergency Contact Closure Input a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input from UL

924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm system b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.

B. 0-10V Lighting Control Module: 1. Meet the following requirements:

a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.

b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources: 1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.

a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929. b) Sink current via IEC 60929.

2. Mechanical: a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment. CSA (Canada) certified,

or NOM (Mexico) approved as applicable. b. Delivered and installed as a [UL] [CSA] listed factory assembled panel. c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

3. Surface mounted 4. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A.


260943.13 - 10

5. Switching: a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles. b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to and removed from load circuits. c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads. d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 16

amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold cathode and motor loads).

6. Connection without interface to wired: a. Occupancy sensors b. Daylight sensors c. IR receivers for personal control



a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state output without interface to: 1) Activate scenes 2) Enable or disable time clock


924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm system b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state. c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.

C. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Module 1. Mechanical:

a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment. CSA (Canada) certified, or NOM (Mexico) approved as applicable.

b. Delivered and installed as a [UL] [CSA] listed factory assembled panel. c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.

2. Supports one or two independent links of up to 64 ballasts per link. 3. Connect without interface to wired:

a. Occupancy sensors b. Daylight sensors c. IR receivers for personal control



a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state output without interface to: 1) Activate afterhours mode 2) Provide basic load shed functionality



260943.13 - 11

924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm system b. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.

9. Programming Connection: a. Provide Ethernet input for wired connection to wireless router. b. Provide ability for programming from an iPod touch or IPhone via wireless router.

2.6 POWER INTERFACES

A. Electrical: 1. Phase independent of control input. 2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508.

B. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of system or processor.

2.7 POWER MODULES

A. Preset lighting control with zone override: 1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone. 2. User-programmable zone and scene names. 3. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface

a. Provide access to: 1) Scene selections. 2) Fade zone to a level. 3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower. 4) Lock out scenes and zones. 5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower. 6) Terminal block for wired infrared signal input. 7) Enable/disable wall station.

4. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display. 5. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading. 6. Integral wide angle infrared receiver. 7. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted

without altering scene values stored in memory. 8. Direct low-voltage control of digital ballasts (field verify 120V, 220/240V, and/or 277V lighting) :

a. Electronically link a digital fluorescent lighting ballast to a zone for both dimming and turn on/off

b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to digital ballasts and line voltage dimmers for proportional daylight harvesting

c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct (no-interface) control.]

B. Preset shade control with zone override: 1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to 3 columns of shade control. 2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted

without altering scene values stored in memory.

2.8 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST AND SWITCHING MODULES

A. General 1. Continuous 3-Wire signal dimming to 3-Wire electronic dimming ballast.


260943.13 - 12

2. Connect without interface to: a. Occupant sensor (motion detector). b. Daylight sensor. c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).

3. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the digital bus.

4. If power is interrupted and subsequently returned, lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.

5. Each ballast responds independently to: a. Up to 32 occupant sensors. b. Up to 64 personal control inputs. c. 2 daylight sensors.

6. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on module cover. 7. Averages 2 independent daylight harvesting inputs internally. 8. Responds to digital load shed command

a. Sets high end trim. b. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command.

1) Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent.

9. Electrical: Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 20. 10. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast module failure in the event of a mis-wire.

B. 2 Amp 3-Wire Ballast Module (if required) 1. Ballast module to integrate up to 2 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballast into a Digital

Network Lighting control system as a single zone.

C. 16 Amp 3-Wire Ballast Module (if required) 1. Ballast module to integrate up to 16 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballast into a Digital

Network Lighting control system as a single zone.]

D. 16 Amp Switching Ballast Module 1. Module to integrate up to 16 amps of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast,

electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold cathode and motor loads) into a Digital Network Lighting control system as a single zone.]

2.9 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT PANEL

A. Provide Lighting Management Panel in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks listed for field wiring.

B. Enables Light Management software to control and monitor digital electronic dimming ballasts and modules, Power Panels, preset controls, and window treatments. 1. Lighting Management Panel utilizes Ethernet connectivity to Digital Network Lighting Control

Manager. a. Dedicated Network Environment is used to connect Digital Electronic Control Manager with

Lighting Management Panels.

C. Integrate control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external inputs into single customizable, multiple failsafe lighting control system, operable manually, automatically or through computer control.


260943.13 - 13

D. Astronomical time clock.

E. Solar clock to track the position of the sun to control the shades to limit penetration of direct sunlight.

F. Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more than ten years without power.

G. BACnet Integration License for Lights 1. Provide ability to communicate by means of BACnet IP communication to Digital Network

Lighting Control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T Ethernet network. 2. Each Lighting Management Panel processor requires license for BACnet integration. 3. Basic BACnet integration license for lights

a. The BACnet integrator can command: 1) Area light output 2) Area enable or disable afterhours mode 3) Area load shed level 4) Area load shed enable/disable

b. The BACnet integrator can monitor: 1) Area on/off status 2) Area occupancy status 3) Area fault 4) Area load shed status 5) Area instantaneous energy usage]

H. BACnet Integration License for Shades 1. Provide ability to communicate by means of BACnet IP communication to Digital Network

Lighting Control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T Ethernet network. 2. Each Lighting Management Panel processor requires license for BACnet integration. 3. Basic BACnet integration license for shades

a. The BACnet integrator can activate area shade group presets. b. The BACnet integrator can monitor area shade group presets.

4. Shade assignment and grouping will be self discoverable with 3rd party building management software.

2.10 LIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTER

A. Server 1. Used for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control, graphics, and data

logging of digital network lighting controls. 2. Used to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems. 3. Computer to be provided by the lighting control system manufacturer. 4. Computer software preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.

2.11 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single manufacturer.

B. Configuration Setup 1. Used to make system programming and configuration changes 2. Windows based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over TCP/IP

connection


260943.13 - 14

3. Allow [manufacturer][user] to: a. Capture system design.

1) Geographical Layout 2) Load Schedule Zoning 3) Shade Grouping 4) Equipment Schedule 5) Equipment assignment to lighting management panels 6) Daylighting design

b. Define the configuration for the following in each area: 1) Lighting Scenes 2) Shade Group Presets 3) Control Station Devices 4) Interface and Integration Equipment 5) Occupancy/After Hours 6) Partitioning 7) Daylighting 8) Emergency Lighting 9) Nitelights

c. Start-up 1) Addressing 2) Daylighting

C. Control and Monitor 1. Basic System View

a. The Light Management Computer Software system navigation and status reporting is performed using a tree view of the building.

2. Optional Graphical Floor plan View a. The Light Management Computer Software system navigation and status reporting is

performed using customized CAD based drawings of your building. Pan and Zoom feature allows for easy navigation. Basic system view is always available.

3. Control of Lights & Shades a. Area lights can be monitored for on/off status. b. All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level. c. For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting scene,

and individual zones may be controlled. d. Area lighting scenes can be modified in real-time, changing the levels zones go to when a

scene is activated. e. Area shades can be monitored for current preset or position. f. Area shades can be opened/closed, sent to a preset, or sent to a specific position.

4. Occupancy a. Area occupancy can be monitored. b. Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of occupancy

sensor problems. c. Area occupancy settings including level lights turn on to when area is occupied and level

lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed in real-time. 5. Daylighting

a. Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. This can be used to override the control currently taking place in the space.

b. Daylight target levels can be changed for each daylit area. This is particularly useful when new departments move into a space.


260943.13 - 15

6. Load Shedding a. Load shedding allows the building manager to monitor whole building lighting power usage

and apply a load shed reduction to selected areas, thereby reducing a building’s power usage.

7. Scheduling a. Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate functions for lights and

shades. 8. Reporting allow the building manager to gather real-time and historical information about the

system as follows: a. Energy Reports – Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of time for

one or more areas. b. Power Reports – Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more areas. c. Activity Report – Shows what activity has taken place over a period of time for one or more

areas. Activity includes occupant activities (i.e. areas going occupied/unoccupied, wall controls being pressed), building manager operation (controlling/changing areas using the control & monitor tool), and device failures (keypads, ballasts, etc. not responding).

d. Lamp Failure Report – Shows which areas are currently reporting lamp failures. 9. Diagnostics

a. Diagnostics allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the lighting control system. Devices will be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or unknown.

10. Administration a. Users – Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be edited. b. Publish Graphical Floor plan – Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor plan files,

allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and day lighting status. c. Back-up Project Database – Allows admin user to backup the project database. The

project database holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area scenes, day lighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock. The Control and Monitor tool can be used to adjust some of these settings, and thus it is important to back-up the project database prior to changing settings in the Design and Setup tool.

11. Publish Project Database – Allows the admin user to send a new project database to the server and download the new configuration to the system. The project database holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area scenes, day lighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.

D. Energy Savings display software 1. Provide software from a single manufacturer that can collect and display energy savings from all

of the lighting components in the lighting control system.]

E. Open Loop Solar Adaptive Algorithm 1. Primary Goals of the shade control system are:

a. Optimize daylight b. Provide manual override capability for occupants via wall mounted keypad or simple

remote control c. Maximize occupants connectivity with outdoors by optimizing view d. Provide diffuse daylight and minimize direct sunlight in the space to reduce solar heat gain

and maximize occupants’ comfort in the space e. Reduce glare f. Shades along same façade will, start, stop and track in unison to maintain a consistent

exterior aesthetic 2. Hardware


260943.13 - 16

a. Independent operation of solar tracking program through non-windows based operating system provided in one or more light management panels.

3. Control Software a. Control software shall incorporate a solar tracking software that:

1) Calculates the sun’s position in the sky relative to the building and then calculates when shade movement is necessary by façade.

2) Calculates the position of the shade to limit direct sunlight penetration to a predetermined limit

b. Control software shall be controlled using the following inputs for start up: 1) Building location 2) Façade orientation 3) Window Dimensions 4) Solar depth of penetration 5) Number of shade movements per day

c. Control software shall require minimal long term maintenance and service. System will not require user to make daily changes to programming or overall system functionality, unless desired by the owner

4. User Interface a. PC Graphic User Interface

1) User Interface will provide access to all adjustable parameters of solar depth of penetration and number of shade movements per day

b. Manual Override 1) Temporary override of the control program shall be capable through optional manual

keypads. 2) Keypads shall be capable of providing manual control of shades in a particular area.]

2.12 LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS

A. System Wall Stations 1. Allows controls of any devices part of the Digital Network Lighting Control System. 2. Product: Preset Lighting Controls with Zone Override. 3. Electronics:

a. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication. 4. Functionality:

a. Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate. b. LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button press was

properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not processed. c. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit. d. Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.

5. Color: a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2.] [Custom color to be selected. b. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units. c. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources

as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request. 6. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware. 7. Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving

descriptions. 8. Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that chemically bonds

graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning. 9. Software Configuration:


260943.13 - 17

a. Customizable control station device button functionality: 1) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action. 2) Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and defined action on

release. 10. Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated:

a. Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels). b. Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on). c. Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on). d. Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).

B. Digital Ballast Wall Stations 1. General:

a. Class 2 (low voltage). b. Integral IR receiver for personal control. c. Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a system command

has been requested. d. Wall stations can be replaced without reprogramming. e. Color: f. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White. g. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units. h. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources

as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request. 2. One Button Control

a. Toggle on/off and master raise/lower control for group of fixtures. 3. Four Button Control

a. Recall 4 Scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures. b. Master raise/lower control entire group of fixtures.

2.13 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES

A. Contact Closure Interface: 1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained contact closures. 2. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.

B. Contact Closure Input Interface: 1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained contact closures.

C. RS232 and Ethernet Interface: 1. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment, touch screens,

etc. 2. Provide control of:

a. Lights scene selections. b. Shade Group Presets. c. Fine-tuning of shade preset or light scenes levels with raise/lower. d. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.

3. Provide status monitoring of: a. Light scene-status. b. Shade Group status. c. Wall station button presses and releases. d. Wall station LEDs.


260943.13 - 18

D. DMX Interface 1. Provide ability to:

a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 channel b. Map a single zone intensity to 3 DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color-control

E. Sensor Module 1. Provide wired inputs for:

a. Occupancy sensors b. Daylight sensors c. IR receivers for personal control d. Digital Ballast Wall Stations

2.14 SENSORS

A. Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors 1. Sensing mechanism - field verify with MSC Client:

a. Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue build-up.

b. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.

c. Dual technology: 1) Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue

build-up. 2) Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal controlled to

operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance. 2. Connect directly to digital electronic dimming ballast and modules without the need of a power

pack or other interface 3. Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a room

or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space 4. Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and

habits. 5. Sensors shall be UL/CUL/NOM listed (as appropriate) 6. Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal lighting

control for any use of the space 7. Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any

adaptive features. 8. Power failure memory:

a. Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected memory shall not be lost.

9. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions. 10. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices. 11. Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors. 12. Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted sensors

using infrared technology. 13. Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors. 14. Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common

outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options.

B. Sensor Power Packs 1. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able to mount

through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained


260943.13 - 19

unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a minimum of three (3) sensors.

2. Power pack shall be plenum rated 3. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L.

Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable

C. Infrared Receivers 1. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication 2. Can be replaced without reprogramming 3. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls 4. Immediate local LED response upon reception of hand held transmitter communication 5. Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB 6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles 7. Constructed via sonic welding 8. Color:

a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White b. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units c. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources

as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.

D. Interior Daylight Sensors 1. Wired daylight Sensor

a. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication b. Can be replaced without reprogramming c. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme d. Stable output over temperature from 0 degrees to 40 degrees C e. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting and

horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection f. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 foot-candles g. Integral IR receiver for personal control h. Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles j. Constructed via sonic welding k. Color:

1) Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White 2) Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units 3) Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light

sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.

E. Exterior Daylight Sensors 1. Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 foot-candles difference

between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds. 2. Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor.

F. Infrared Partition Sensor 1. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close).

2.15 ACCESSORIES

A. Emergency Lighting Interface


260943.13 - 20

1. Provides total system listing to UL924 when used with Digital Network Lighting Control system. 2. Senses all three phases of building power. 3. Provides an output to power panels or Digital Ballast Interfaces if power on any phase fails and

sends all lights controlled by these devices to [an emergency light level setting] [100 percent intensity]. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power is restored.

4. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.

B. Infrared Transmitters: 1. Provide wireless remote control. 2. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control;

compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter. 3. Operate up to 15 meters (50 feet) within line-of-sight to that receiver. 4. “Learnable” by other variable frequency remote controls.

2.16 ROLLER SHADES

A. General: 1. Ultra-quiet, precision-controlled electronic drive unit housed inside roller tube, controlling shade

movement. 2. Audible noise: Maximum 44 dBA measured 3 feet from electronic drive unit. No audible clicks

when motor starts or stops. 3. Operate independently, without use of external group controllers. 4. Control shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.0625 inch throughout entire travel. 5. Include 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade grouping

and subgrouping, and system configuration. 6. Systems with multiple electronic drive units electronically synchronized to start, stop, and move

in unison.

B. Grouping: 1. Keypads and contact closure inputs can control any electronic drive unit without separate group

controller. 2. System may contain multiple electronic drive units. 3. Keypads and interfaces able to operate any group or subgroup of electronic drive units within a

subsystem.

C. System Controls: 1. Shades controlled by built-in shade columns on lighting control or by keypad. 2. System devices, including shades and lighting controls, connected through common

communication link.

D. System Performance: 1. One-touch control of shades by means of keypad, lighting control, or infrared remote. 2. Capable of stopping within accuracy of 0.125 inch at any point between open and close limits. 3. Store over 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any other position. 4. Presets set by 5-second button push and hold from keypad, lighting control, or handheld remote

control. 5. Presets recalled by keypad, contact closure input, infrared receiver, Light Management System

Software, or other lighting control system interface. 6. Open and close limits programmable from electronic drive unit, lighting control, wall-mounted

keypad, or handheld remote control.

E. Power Supplies:


260943.13 - 21

1. Electronic drive units powered with 24 VDC from approved power supply; power supply via NEC Class 2 power source.

2. Provide power panel including 10 individual outputs.

2.17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform full-function testing on all completed assemblies at end of line. Statistical sampling is not acceptable.

B. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all ballasts at the factory.

C. Audit burn-in at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature of dimming assemblies and panels at full load for two hours.

D. Perform burn-in at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature on 100 percent of all ballasts at the factory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Provide dedicated network between Digital Network Lighting Control Manager computer and Lighting Management Panels.

D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional equipment required to provide control intent.

E. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.

F. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.

G. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources; ceiling mounted and fixture-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of luminaries.

H. Season lamps at full intensity according to lamp manufacturer’s recommendation.

I. Lead lengths to lamp sockets not to exceed three feet (.9m) for T4 4-pin compact lamps and T5 BIAX and seven feet (2.1 m) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps.

J. Rapid starts sockets must meet IEC 60400

3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT

A. Startup and Programming 1. Provide factory certified field service engineer to make minimum of three site visits to ensure

proper system installation and operation under following parameters a. Qualifications for factory certified field service engineer:

1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field. 2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.

b. Make first visit prior to installation of wiring. Review:


260943.13 - 22

1) Low voltage wiring requirements. 2) Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring. 3) Wire labeling. 4) Lighting Management Panel locations and installations. 5) Control locations. 6) Computer jack locations. 7) Load circuit wiring. 8) Network wiring requirements. 9) Connections to other equipment. 10) Installer responsibilities. 11) Power Panel locations.

c. Make second visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control System: 1) Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits. 2) Verify connection and location of controls. 3) Energize Lighting Management Panels and download system data program. 4) Address devices. 5) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel. 6) Download system panel data to dimming/switching panels 7) Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of by-pass

jumpers. 8) Verify system operation control by control. 9) Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment. 10) Verify proper operation of manufacturers supplied PC and installed programs. 11) Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and occupant

sensors. 12) Initial calibration of sensors. 13) Obtain sign-off on system functions.

d. Make third visit to demonstrate and educate Owner’s representative on system capabilities, operation and maintenance.

2. Startup a. Lighting configuration

1) Naming and association of areas and lighting zones. b. After Hours Start-up

1) Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)]

B. Training of customer representatives for Light management computer software 1. Configuration Software used to make system programming and configuration changes 2. Control and Monitor 3. Energy Savings Display Software

C. Tech Support 1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer Services 1. Aim and Focus Visit

a. Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the


260943.13 - 23

system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Training Visit 1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 4 days additional on-site system training to site

personnel.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.

B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE05/10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009; Errata 2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters

ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable, Water Supplied

ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements for Pressurized Flushing Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater

AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied

AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints

AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

Page 1

AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS B2.2 (1991) Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves

ASME A112.19.2 (2003; R 2008) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals

ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts

ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use

ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.23 (2002; R 2006) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.24 (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500

ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and

Page 2

Welding End

ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300

ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.5 (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A 733 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

ASTM A 74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A 888 (2009) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

ASTM B 306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

ASTM B 32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM C 1053 (2000; R 2005) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications

ASTM C 564 (2009) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Page 3

Fittings

ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2235 (2004) Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D 2447 (2003) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter

ASTM D 2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D 2467 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2564 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D 2661 (2008) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2665 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2672 (1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement

ASTM D 2683 (2004) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing

ASTM D 2737 (2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing

ASTM D 2846/D 2846M (2009b) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

Page 4

(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems

ASTM D 2855 (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3122 (1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3138 (2004) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Piping Components

ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM F 1760 (2001; R 2005e1) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content

ASTM F 2389 2007e1) Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems

ASTM F 409 (2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings

ASTM F 437 (2009) Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F 438 (2009) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM F 439 (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F 441/F 441M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

ASTM F 442/F 442M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

Page 5

ASTM F 477 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 493 (2004) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F 628 (2008) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core

ASTM F 877 (2007) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold- Water Distribution Systems

ASTM F 891 (2009) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core

CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

CISPI 301 (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

CISPI 310 (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO)

IAPMO PS 117 (2005) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gasketed W/ Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings for Install On CU Tubing

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-110 (1996) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions

MSS SP-44 (2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges

MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

Page 6

MSS SP-67 (2002a) Butterfly Valves

MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports -

MSS SP-83 (2006) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded

MSS SP-85 (2002) Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 90A (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF/ANSI 14 (2008e) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSF/ANSI 61 (2009) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)

PPFA-01 (2004) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System

PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

Page 7

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Plumbing System

Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code.. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.

SD-03 Product Data

Fixtures; (LEED)

List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.

Flush valve water closets

Flush valve urinals

Countertop lavatories

Welding

A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.

Plumbing System

Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests, Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.

Page 8

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Plumbing System

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.3.2 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.4 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.3.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned

Page 9

property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 Welding

Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained

Page 10

in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II. PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content, with a minimum of 15 percent post-consumer recycled content. HDPE pipe shall contain a minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled content. Cement pipe shall contain recycled content as specified in [Section 03 31 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.Steel pipe shall contain a minimum of 30 percent recycled content, with a minimum of 16 percent post-consumer recycled content. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size and shall comply with NSF/ANSI 14, NSF/ANSI 61 and ASTM F 2389. Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating.. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in buildings greater than three stories including any basement levels.

2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials

Page 11

Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:

a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74, AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310

b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.

c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 (Grade 65-45-12), Copper ASTM A 536.

d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR.

e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.

f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.

g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.

h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.

i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.

j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.

k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D 2000, maximum temperature 230 degrees F.

l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.

m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183.

n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure Piping Components: ASTM D 3138.

o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2235.

p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2564 and ASTM D 2855.

Page 12

q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 493.

r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.

s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3122.

t. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's approved application guidelines.

u. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.

v. Heat-fusion joints for polypropylene piping: ASTM F 2389.

2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:

a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm or piston type.

b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.

c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.

d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.

e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.

f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.

g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.

h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.

i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.

j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.

k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.

2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material

Page 13

Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.3 VALVES

Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:

Description Standard

Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67

Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-70

Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged andThreaded Ends MSS SP-71

Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service MSS SP-72

Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-110

Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-78Threaded Ends

Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80

Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34

Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-85Threaded Ends

Backwater Valves ASME A112.14.1

Vacuum Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22

Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22for Hot Water Supply Systems

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves ASME CSD-1for Automatically Fired HotWater Boilers Safety Code No., Part CW, Article

Page 14

2.3.1 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves, thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F of any setting.

2.4 FIXTURES

Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains may contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not less than 2 years. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees F water temperature.

2.4.1 Automatic Controls

Provide automatic, sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with ASSE 1037 and UL 1951 for lavatory faucets. Flushing and faucet systems shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with light beam sensors.

2.4.2 Flush Valve Water Closets

ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, wall mounted, wall outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 17 to water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat with no cover.Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed1.6 gallons per flush. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11

Page 15

inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.(See plumbing drawings for detail information).

2.4.3 Flush Valve Urinals

ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim 24 inches above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 0.5 gallons per flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture.(See plumbing drawings for detail information).

2.4.4 Countertop Lavatories

ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china,self-rimming, minimum dimensions of 16 1/2" inches wide by 13 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets. (See plumbing drawings for detail information).

2.5 TRAPS

Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 Traps shall be with a cleanout. Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.

2.5.1 Drinking-Water Coolers (TWO STATION WALL MOUNTED WATER COOLER)

AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 8.00 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair

Page 16

carriers. Provide for wheelchair model 27 inch minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch maximum spout height above floor.

2.6 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]2.5.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings

Provide single control pressure equalizing bathtub and shower faucets with body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of 2.5 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and bathtub diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups, drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between drain pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy adjustable tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required. Provide bathtub and shower valve with ball type control handle.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

2.6.1 Escutcheon Plates

Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.

2.6.2 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not required where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.

2.6.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete

Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.

2.6.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete

Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

2.6.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)

Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S

Page 17

beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.

2.6.4 Nameplates

Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.

2.6.5 Labels

Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following information on each label:

a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with written description.

b. Range of the sensor.

c. Battery replacement schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A ball valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.

3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections

3.1.1.1 Utilities

Page 18

The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.

3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment.

3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts

Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.

3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains

Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable seat and [gate] [full port ball] [ball] valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.

Page 19

3.1.1.6 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters

Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.

3.1.2 Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

3.1.2.1 Threaded

Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.

3.1.2.2 Mechanical Couplings

Mechanical couplings may be used in conjunction with grooved pipe for aboveground, ferrous or non-ferrous, domestic hot and cold water systems, in lieu of unions, brazed, soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded joints.

Mechanical couplings are permitted in accessible locations including behind access plates. Flexible grooved joints will not be permitted, except as vibration isolators adjacent to mechanical equipment. Rigid grooved joints shall incorporate an angle bolt pad design which maintains metal-to-metal contact with equal amount of pad offset of housings upon installation to ensure positive rigid clamping of the pipe.

Designs which can only clamp on the bottom of the groove or which utilize gripping teeth or jaws, or which use misaligned housing bolt holes, or which require a torque wrench or torque specifications will not be permitted.

Rigid grooved pipe couplings shall be for use with grooved end pipes, fittings, valves and strainers. Rigid couplings shall be designed for not less than 125 psi service and appropriate for static head plus the pumping head, and shall provide a watertight joint.

Grooved fittings and couplings, and grooving tools shall be provided from the same manufacturer. Segmentally welded elbows shall not be used. Grooves shall be prepared in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's latest published standards. Grooving shall be performed by qualified grooving operators having demonstrated proper grooving procedures in accordance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations.

The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of test to demonstrate operator's capability, and the test shall be performed at the

Page 20

work site, if practical, or at a site agreed upon. The operator shall demonstrate the ability to properly adjust the grooving tool, groove the pipe, and to verify the groove dimensions in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications.

3.1.2.3 Unions and Flanges

Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.

3.1.2.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints

Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations.

3.1.2.5 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe

Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.2.6 Copper Tube and Pipe

a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2, MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.

b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.

c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.

d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.1.2.7 Plastic Pipe

Page 21

Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.

3.1.2.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe

Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D 2657 and ASTM F 1290. Joints for filament-wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unions or flanges shall be used where required for disconnection and inspection.

3.1.2.9 Polypropylene Pipe

Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding socket-type or butt-fusion type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F 2389.

3.1.3 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings

Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)][Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT] [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)][Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT]. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.

3.1.4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing

Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.

3.1.4.1 Sleeve Requirements

Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:

Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.

A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a

Page 22

waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.

Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.

Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of [ 1/4 inch ][ one inch ] clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.

Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.

Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and [concrete] [masonry] wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.4.2 Flashing Requirements

Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe

Page 23

or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.

3.1.4.3 Waterproofing

Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed.

3.1.4.4 Optional Counterflashing

Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:

a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.

b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.

3.1.4.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors

Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.1.4.6 Pipe Penetrations

Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.1.5 Fire Seal

Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase

Page 24

walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.6 Supports

3.1.6.1 General

Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.

3.1.6.2 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.

a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.

b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.

c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.

d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.

g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.

h. Type 40 shields shall:

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.

Page 25

i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:

(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.

m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.

n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.

3.1.6.3 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

3.1.7 Welded Installation

Page 26

Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.8 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be [cast iron] [or] [plastic].

3.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS

Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as

Page 27

specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.

3.2.1 Fixture Connections

Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used.

3.2.2 Flushometer Valves

Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the flushometer spud.

3.2.3 Fixture Supports

Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.

3.2.3.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.

3.2.3.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.

3.2.3.3 Support for Wood Stud Construction

Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick

Page 28

minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.

3.2.3.4 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets

Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.

3.2.4 Access Panels

Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in[ Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.2.5 Sight Drains

Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 2 inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.

3.2.6 Traps

Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

3.3.1 Identification Tags

Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.

3.4 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

3.4.1 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.

a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.

Page 29

b. Building Sewers Tests.

c. Water Supply Systems Tests.

3.4.2 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3.4.3 System Flushing

3.4.3.1 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with [hot] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.

3.4.3.2 After Flushing

System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building.

3.4.4 Operational Test

Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a

Page 30

period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:

a. Time, date, and duration of test.

b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.

c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.

d. Operation of each valve, and faucet.

e. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.

3.4.5 Disinfection

After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed.

Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until the entire system is completely filled.

Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.

After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system.

Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.

Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations specified by the Contracting OfficerTest these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with [EPA SM 9223] [AWWA 10084]. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements.

Page 31

Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.

3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse.

3.6 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.

3.7 TABLES

TABLE IPIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR

DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub X X X X X and spigot, ASTM A 74 with compression gaskets. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark.

2 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, X X X X CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark.

3 Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, X X X ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10

4 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) X X

Page 32


DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F-------------------------------------------------------------------------- ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10

5 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and X X X X non-ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M

6 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X X for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M for use with Item 5

7 Bronze sand casting grooved joint X X X X pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5

8 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure X X pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B 75 C12200, ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000, ASME B16.22 ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5

9 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X galvanized ASME B16.3 for use with Item 10

10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, X X X ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

11 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43 X X

12 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X ASME B16.24 for use with Items 11 and 14

13 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X pressure fittings, ASME B16.18 for use with Item 14

14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X

15 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X ASME B16.15

16 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), X* X X* X X ASTM B 306

17 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X alloy solder-joint drainage

Page 33


DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F-------------------------------------------------------------------------- fittings. ASME B16.29

18 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X X drainage fittings, DWV, ASME B16.23

19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) X X X X X X plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe and fittings ASTM D 2661, ASTM F 628

20 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, X X X X X X waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D 2665, ASTM F 891, (Sch 40) ASTM F 1760

21 Process glass pipe and fittings, X ASTM C 1053

22 High-silicon content cast iron pipe X X X and fittings (hub and spigot, and mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M

23 Polypropylene (PP) waste pipe and X fittings, ASTM D 4101

24 Filament-wound reinforced thermosetting X resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996

SERVICE:

A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings C - Underground Vent D - Aboveground Vent E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground * - Hard Temper

TABLE IIPIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 34


-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D--------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X X X a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3 for use with Item 4a

b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X for use with Item 4b

2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe X X X ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M, non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M,

3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use with Item 2

4 Steel pipe: X X X X a. Seamless, galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

b. Seamless, black, X ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

5 Seamless red brass pipe, X X X ASTM B 43

6 Bronze flanged fittings, X X X ASME B16.24 for use with Items 5 and 7

7 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X X X

8 Seamless copper water tube, X** X** X** X*** ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M

9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X ASME B16.15 for use with Items 5 and 7

10 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint X X X X pressure fittings, ASME B16.22 for use with Items 5, 7 and 8

11 Cast copper alloy solder-joint X X X X pressure fittings, ASME B16.18

Page 35


-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D-------------------------------------------------------------------------- for use with Item 8

12 Bronze and sand castings grooved X X X joint pressure fittings for non- ferrous pipe ASTM B 584, for use with Item 2

13 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, X X Schedules 40 and 80, based on outside diameter ASTM D 2447

14 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X (SDR-PR), based on controlled outside diameter, ASTM D 3035

15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X (SIDR-PR), based on controlled inside diameter, ASTM D 2239

16 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic X X pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261 for use with Items 14, 15, and 16

17 Socket-type polyethylene fittings X X for outside diameter-controlled polyethylene pipe, ASTM D 2683 for use with Item 15

18 Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing, X X ASTM D 2737

19 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic hot and cold water distribution system, ASTM D 2846/D 2846M

20 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M

21 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM F 442/F 442M

22 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM F 437, for use with Items 20, and 21

Page 36


-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D--------------------------------------------------------------------------23 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F 438 for use with Items 20, 21, and 22

24 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings Schedule 80, ASTM F 439 for use with Items 20, 21, and 22

25 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, X X Schedules 40, 80, and 120, ASTM D 1785

26 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated X X pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D 2241

27 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe X X fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466

28 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D 2467 for use with Items 26 and 27

29 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D 2464

30 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent X X cement, ASTM D 2672

31 Polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe and X X X fittings; ASTM F 2389

32 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44 X X

33 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18 ASTM B 828

34 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X socket-welding and threaded, MSS SP-83

35 Malleable-iron threaded pipe X X unions ASME B16.39

36 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733 X X X

Page 37


-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D--------------------------------------------------------------------------37 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) X X X Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877

38 Press Fittings X X

A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses. ** - Type L - Hard *** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors **** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints

-- End of Section --

Page 38

NOT FINAL DESIGN - PRELIMINARY CONCEPT FOR REFERENCE ONLY




MSC LOGO - ETCHED ON GLAZING PANELS WHERE NOTED ON DWGS

EcoFlex is the premiere cushion back carpet tile for performance and comfort. It’s advanced composite

structure creates the most stable modular platform while offering superior resiliency and delivering maximum

comfort underfoot. The result - a modular system that is ergonomically effective and environmentally friendly.

ADVANCED ERGONOMICS

• Unsurpassed comfort underfoot –

reduces leg fatigue and reduces falls

• Superior acoustical and sound

absorbing properties

• Excellent cushion resiliency

• Superior thermal insulation benefits

over hard-back tile

• Withstands the toughest rolling and

foot traffic

REINFORCED WOVEN SYNTHETIC

THERMOSET CO-POLYMER

FIBERGLASS

ECOFLEX THERMOSET CUSHION

THERMOSET LAMINATE

EcoFlex™ Modular Systems Sustainable Performance with Ergonomic Benefits

SUSTAINABILITY

• Contains 12% Post Industrial and 3% Post

Consumer Recycled content based on total

product Weight*

• Contains no plasticizers, no PVC

• Recyclable through Mohawk’s

ReCover program

• Meets USGBC LEED criteria for recycled content

• CRI Green Label Plus certified

* Use of ColorStand Solution Dyed Nylon increases the recycled content

SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE

• Unsurpassed dimensional stability –

no growing or shrinking

• Superior appearance retention – no

edge ravel, zippering or delamination,

high tuft bind

• Advanced Thermoset polyurethane

compound gives long term strength

and stability

• Moisture barrier meets the require-

ments of the “British Spill and 10,000

Impact Penetration” Test (not at seams)

500 TOWNPARK LANE, SUITE 400 • KENNESAW, GEORGIA 30144 • 800-554-6637 • WWW.MOHAWKGROUP.COM

ITEMS UNDER WARRANTY

WEAR

Carpet maintains at least 90% of surface weight ............................................................................................................. L I FET IME

STATIC PROTECTION

Carpet will not give static discharge above 3.5 KV .......................................................................................................... L I FET IME

EDGE RAVEL

No carpet ends will come out at lengthwise seam .......................................................................................................... L I FET IME

ZIPPERING

Carpet will not zipper or develop continuous yarn run ................................................................................................... L I FET IME

DELAMINATION

Carpet will not delaminate (separate from the backing) ................................................................................................ L I FET IME

IMPERVIOUS TO LIQUIDS

Carpet will not lose usable properties from normal activity ......................................................................................... L I FET IME

Liquid barrier (Non-seam areas) .............................................................................................................................................. L I FET IME

DIMENSIONAL STABILITY

Carpet will not shrink or grow ................................................................................................................................................... L I FET IME

Carpet will not be affected by atmosphere, temperature or humidity (cupping, doming, dishing) .................... L I FET IME

Cushion resiliency ......................................................................................................................................................................... L I FET IME

Tuft bind control ............................................................................................................................................................................. L I FET IME

LIMITATIONS

The Mohawk Group EcoFlex Warranty does not cover damage caused by abnormal use or damage not rising

out of a defect in the carpet. This includes burns, tears, pulls, cuts, installation on stairs or damage caused by

improper maintenance or damage in transit.

Excludes edge ravel to access floor outlets or trench header ducts.

Excludes dye lot variation or change in color due to improper maintenance.

Excludes conditions resulting from other than ordinary wear.

Lifetime of Carpet is defined by The Mohawk Group to be the lifetime of the original purchaser for a particular installation.

* See The Mohawk Group official warranty documents for further details.

EcoFlex™ Warranty Highlights*

The Mohawk Group’s EcoFlex Modular Carpet Tiles form the industry’s most stable, ergonomically efficient and advanced

composite ever introduced. Lifetime warranties* protect your investment against all performance failures that are critical

to modular effectiveness. EcoFlex also contains both post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content, making it

environmentally friendly.

Printed on recycled paper made from 100% recycled fiber including 100% post-consumer fiber, and meets the Environmental Defense definition of TCF (Totally Chlorine Free).

ECFLX SLT0001118

Carpet Recycling Program

Our sustainable technologies help keep carpet on the floor longer. And when its time to recycle your old carpet, call our toll free hot line 877-3RE-CYCL and we’ll handle the rest.

Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC A Service Disabled Veteran Owned Small Business (SDVOSB)

Verified by the Department of Veterans Affairs Center for Veterans Enterprise (CVE)

GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION Federal Supply Service Authorized Federal Supply Schedule Price List

On‐line access to contract ordering information, terms and conditions, up‐to‐date pricing, and the option to create an electronic delivery order is available through GSA Advantage, a menu‐driven database system. The INTERNET address for GSA Advantage is http://www.gsaadvantage.gov/. For more information on ordering from Federal Supply Schedule click on the FSS Schedules button at http://www.fss.gsa.gov.

FSC Group 72, Part 1, Section A DUNS#: 08‐699‐7271 Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0036V Tax ID: 26‐0770573 Contract Period –Contract Ends August 27, 2014 Cage Code: 4WL20 CONTRACTOR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC Saylor Marketing, Inc. 1052 Eliot Street 801 Wincrest Place Oceanside, CA 92057‐2651 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected] Business Size: SDVOSB

INFORMATION FOR ORDERING ACTIVITIES

1a. Awarded SINS: 31‐301 Broadloom 31‐303 Carpet Tile 31‐601 Broadloom and Carpet Tile with recycled content 31‐602 Floor recycling program 31‐603 Cleaning chemicals 31‐604 Installation Services 1b. Lowest Price each SIN: 31‐301 Pixel $ 14.50 31‐303 All carpet tile products $ 26.63 31‐601 Odessa $ 28.04 31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 31‐603 6007 Odor Gone $ 11.82 31‐603 Hot water extraction $ 0.10 31‐604 Installation carpet tile $ 6.57 2. Maximum Order Limitation: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 Carpet (12’), Carpet Tile 24”x24” $500,000 SIN(s) 31‐602 Flooring recycling program $150,000 SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 Installation services (carpet) $150,000 Installation services (resilient) $150,000 Cleaning chemicals $150,000 Cleaning services (CARP) $150,000 3. Minimum Order: $500 4. Geographic Coverage: All SINs – Continental United States 5. Point of Production 716 Bill Myles Drive Saraland AL 26571 6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Deducted Including reduction in IFF to 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 7. Quantity Discounts: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 ‐3.5% over 5,000 sy 8. Prompt Payment: 1% 20 days, net 30 days

9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted 9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount 0% ‐ Net 30 days 10. Foreign Items: None 11. Time of Delivery: SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 40 days or sooner SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner SIN 31‐601 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner Express Shipment available – by request

12. FOB Point: All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port 13. Order Address: Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 14. Payment Address: Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 15. Warranty: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 the Warranty Provisions under 552.246‐17 applies for two years along with

the commercial warranty. After two years only the commercial warranties as shown in the catalogs remain.

SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One Year 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract 18. Maintenance: Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction. Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics. 19. Installation: Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet.



Carpet Installation Services

GS‐27F‐0036V

Scope of Work

Prices shown herein are for installation in an open empty space on a “clean floor”. A “clean floor” is in a condition to accept carpet/carpet tile with no additional preparation other than sweeping it clean. Any other work, e.g. furniture removal, flash patching, cove molding, removal of existing carpet, disposal off‐site, recycling, etc., will be quoted on a case by case basis after a site inspection. When installation is required in conjunction with carpet purchased under this contract, the carpet will be invoiced separately and before the installation. Prices quoted are for work to be performed during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, holidays excluded. Where noted in the pricing, minimum charges for installation will apply. All work will be performed by either mill certified or FCIB certified installers. All work performed and materials used to install carpet will be guaranteed for a minimum of one year.

CARPET INSTALLATION SERVICES 48 Contiguous States, & District of Columbia

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down w/o attached cushion 6.82 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down with attached cushion 7.27 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – double stick or double glue down 8.74 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – stretch‐in over separate cushion 7.07 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – carpet tiles full spread 6.57 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift (see note below) 10.10 per square yard

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base 1.95 per linear foot

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Carpet Base 2.47 per linear foot



SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 4.25 per square yard

Removal, Disposal and Floor Prep Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation. Note: Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work necessary to address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold and mildew, or extensive floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case basis. Furniture Lifting for Carpet Replacement (SIN 31‐604) Using appropriate “lifting” equipment and trained technicians, allows installation of new carpet tile, with modular and systems furniture in place and with minimal disruption to occupied work area. All furniture systems shall be lifted by equipment which has been structurally engineered for that particular furniture system. No crowbars or modified car jacks are to be used. No phones or electronic equipment shall be unplugged. After each installation session, work area must be returned to normal working order with all furniture in original location. Since work is being performed in an occupied work area, “low VOC” or “no VOC” adhesives are to be used. The GSA carpet contractor will be required to provide, upon request from government customers, an onsite demonstration of the equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement decisions.



Vinyl Installation Services GS‐27F‐0036V

Scope of Work


VINYL INSTALLATION SERVICES 48 Contiguous States, & District of Columbia

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of vinyl composition or solid vinyl tile 1.95 per square foot

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of rubber tile 10.50 per square foot

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of static dissipative tile 7.75 per square foot SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down by perimeter adhesive method (residential sheet vinyl)

31.50 per square foot

SIN 31‐604 – heat welding seams on vinyl sheet flooring 5.50 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – flash coving vinyl sheet flooring at walls 12.50 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base 1.95 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – install cove base (carpet type) 1.85 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – install risers 41.50 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – install stringers 8.50 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – install stair nosing 41.50 per linear foot

SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 0.50 per square foot

Removal, Disposal and Floor Prep Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation. Note: Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work necessary to address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold and mildew, or extensive floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case basis.





FSC Group 72, Part 1, Section A DUNS#: 08‐699‐7271 Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0036V Tax ID: 26‐0770573 Contract Period –Contract Ends August 27, 2014 Cage Code: 4WL20 CONTRACTOR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC Saylor Marketing, Inc. 1052 Eliot Street 801 Wincrest Place Oceanside, CA 92057‐2651 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected] Business Size: SDVOSB


1a. Awarded SINS: 31‐301 Broadloom 31‐303 Carpet Tile 31‐601 Broadloom and Carpet Tile with recycled content 31‐602 Floor recycling program 31‐603 Cleaning chemicals 31‐604 Installation Services 1b. Lowest Price each SIN: 31‐301 Pixel $ 14.50 31‐303 All carpet tile products $ 26.63 31‐601 Odessa $ 28.04 31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 31‐603 6007 Odor Gone $ 11.82 31‐603 Hot water extraction $ 0.10 31‐604 Installation carpet tile $ 6.57 2. Maximum Order Limitation: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 Carpet (12’), Carpet Tile 24”x24” $500,000 SIN(s) 31‐602 Flooring recycling program $150,000 SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 Installation services (carpet) $150,000 Installation services (resilient) $150,000 Cleaning chemicals $150,000 Cleaning services (CARP) $150,000 3. Minimum Order: $500 4. Geographic Coverage: All SINs – Continental United States 5. Point of Production 716 Bill Myles Drive Saraland AL 26571 6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Deducted Including reduction in IFF to 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 7. Quantity Discounts: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 ‐3.5% over 5,000 sy 8. Prompt Payment: 1% 20 days, net 30 days

9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted 9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount 0% ‐ Net 30 days 10. Foreign Items: None 11. Time of Delivery: SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 40 days or sooner SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner SIN 31‐601 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner Express Shipment available – by request

12. FOB Point: All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port 13. Order Address: Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 14. Payment Address: Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 15. Warranty: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 the Warranty Provisions under 552.246‐17 applies for two years along with

the commercial warranty. After two years only the commercial warranties as shown in the catalogs remain.

SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One Year 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract 18. Maintenance: Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction. Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics. 19. Installation: Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet.



Carpet Installation Services

GS‐27F‐0036V

Scope of Work


CARPET INSTALLATION SERVICES 48 Contiguous States, & District of Columbia

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down w/o attached cushion 6.82 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down with attached cushion 7.27 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – double stick or double glue down 8.74 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – stretch‐in over separate cushion 7.07 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – carpet tiles full spread 6.57 per square yard

SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift (see note below) 10.10 per square yard





SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 4.25 per square yard

Removal, Disposal and Floor Prep Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation. Note: Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work necessary to address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold and mildew, or extensive floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case basis. Furniture Lifting for Carpet Replacement (SIN 31‐604) Using appropriate “lifting” equipment and trained technicians, allows installation of new carpet tile, with modular and systems furniture in place and with minimal disruption to occupied work area. All furniture systems shall be lifted by equipment which has been structurally engineered for that particular furniture system. No crowbars or modified car jacks are to be used. No phones or electronic equipment shall be unplugged. After each installation session, work area must be returned to normal working order with all furniture in original location. Since work is being performed in an occupied work area, “low VOC” or “no VOC” adhesives are to be used. The GSA carpet contractor will be required to provide, upon request from government customers, an onsite demonstration of the equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement decisions.



Vinyl Installation Services GS‐27F‐0036V

Scope of Work
















January 6, 2009 LEED THE WAY

M O N T E R E Y C & A C R O S S L E Y

C&A TILE & SIX-FOOT LEED PRODUCT CHART Products can help contribute to a possible 9 points for LEED NC/CI and 15 points for LEED EB

Possible LEED

Credit Pts.

ER3® RS Modular

Tile

Ethos modular tile

Conserv modular tile

Flex-Aire™ RS cushion

tile

ER3® Cushion RS

Ethos™ Cushion RS

Powerbond® Closed Cell Vinyl Cushion

Powerbond® Condensed

Vinyl Cushion

Construction Waste Management MR credits 2.1 & 2.2 for NC & CI

MR credits 1.1 & 1.2 for EB

1-2

Vinyl-backed Carpet is 100% recyclable back into carpet in C&A’s closed loop recycling process.

Total Recycle Content* MR credits 4.1 & 4.2 for NC & CI

MR credits 2.1-2.5 for EB

1-2

44-59%

26 – 41%

0%

15 - 26%

39-52%

36-52%

0%

0%

Overall Post Consumer (depending on style)

10%

0%

0%

0%

10%

10%

0%

0%

Overall Pre-consumer (depending on style)

34-49%

26 – 41%

0%

15 - 26%

29-42%

26-42%

0%

0%

Regional Materials Product Manufacture

MR credits 5.1 & 5.2 for NC & CI MR credits 2.1-2.5 for EB

1-2

36%

Dalton, GA

25%

Dalton, GA

2%

Dalton, GA

7%

Dalton, GA

40%

Dalton, GA

10%

Dalton, GA

10%

Dalton, GA

9%

Dalton, GA

Sustainable Cleaning Products MR credits 4.1-4.3 for EB

1-3

Tandus can recommend green cleaning products

IEQ: Carpet IEQ credits 4.3 for NC & CI MR credits 3.1-3.2 for EB

1

Meets CRI Green Label Plus

IEQ: Adhesive IEQ credits 4.1 for NC & CI MR credits 3.1-3.2 for EB

1

Product available with pre-applied RS adhesive. Meets Green Label Plus & SCAQMD Rule#1168

IEQ: Entryway Systems IEQ credit 10.1 for EB

1

Tandus can provide entryway systems

IEQ: Cleaning Equipment / Policy IEQ credit 10.3 & 10.6 for EB

1-2

Tandus can recommend procedures and equipment.

ID: Certified Products ID Credit

1

C&A recycled content products are certified to the NSF 140 Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard.

THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATIONS

Recycled Content Certified by SCS

Certified bySCS

Certified by SCS

NSF 140 Standard Platinum Gold Platinum California Gold Standard California

Platinum California

Gold California Platinum

Possible Point Total 15

Carpet Resources, Inc. Tandus Flooring, Inc. – C&A, Monterey, Crossley

Carpet Tile, Broadloom Carpet & Installation Services



FSC Group 72, Part 1, Section A DUNS#: 96‐928‐8125

Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0504H Tax ID: 54‐1827791 Contract Period – October 1, 1997 through August 29, 2013 Cage Code: 1BJJ5 CONTRACTOR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Carpet Resources, Inc. Saylor Marketing, Inc. 801 Wincrest Place 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected] Business Size: Woman Owned Small Business


1a. Awarded SINS: 31‐301 Broadloom 31‐303 Carpet Tile 31‐601 Recycled Content 31‐603 Custom Colors – Broadloom & Carpet Tile Vinyl and Carpet Base 31‐604 Installation Services 1b. Lowest Price each SIN: 31‐301 Starting Point II $12.63 31‐303 Explorer $16.25 31‐601 Sail Away $16.79 31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $1.95 31‐604 Installation $6.50 2. Maximum Order Limitation: SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 Carpet and Carpet Tile ‐ $500,000 SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 Installation ‐ $150,000 3. Minimum Order: $500 4. Geographic Coverage: All SINs – Continental United States 5. Point of Production 311 Smith Industrial Blvd. Dalton, GA 30721 6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Including IFF of 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 7. Quantity Discounts: SIN(s) 31‐301,31‐303, 31‐601 ‐ None 8. Prompt Payment: Net 30 days 9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted 9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount 0% ‐ Net 30 days 10. Foreign Items: None 11. Time of Delivery: SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 60 days or sooner

SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 60 days or sooner SIN 31‐601 Recycled 12’,Tile ‐ 60 days or sooner Express Shipment in 5 business days ARO available

12. FOB Point: All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port 13. Order Address: Carpet Resources, Inc. 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 14. Payment Address: Carpet Resources, Inc. 801 Wincrest Place Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606 15. Warranty: Tandus Flooring, Inc. commercial warranty applies. SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One Year 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract 18. Maintenance: Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction. Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics. 19. Installation: Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet. Call (703) 757‐7605 for assistance. 20‐23. Not Applicable 24. Inside Delivery: Quote ‐ per JOB BASIS. Call (703) 757‐7605 for assistance. 25. SIN 31‐303 All Carpet Tile backing contains recycled content

Carpet Resources, Inc. GS‐27F‐0504H

INSTALLATION SERVICES Scope of Work


INSTALLATION 48 Contiguous States, & District of Columbia

Boston, New York, Chicago, St. Louis, Kansas City, Miami, San Francisco, and Los Angles

SIN 31‐604 ‐ direct glue down w/o attached cushion $ 6.50 $ 7.75

SIN 31‐604 ‐ direct glue down with attached cushion $ 6.50 $ 7.20

SIN 31‐604 ‐ double stick or double glue down $ 7.25 $ 10.55

SIN 31‐604 ‐ stretch‐in over separate cushion $ 7.00 $ 8.75

SIN 31‐604 ‐ carpet tiles full spread $ 6.50 $ 7.50

SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift $ 10.10 $ 10.10

ACCESSORIES 48 Contiguous States, & District of Columbia

Boston, New York, Chicago, St. Louis, Kansas City, Miami, San Francisco, and Los Angles

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 $ 1.95

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Carpet Base $ 2.25 $ 2.25

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 6” Vinyl Base $ 2.57 $ 2.57

SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 6” Carpet Base $ 2.73 $ 2.73

Furniture Lifting for Carpet Replacement (SIN 31‐604) Using appropriate “lifting” equipment and trained technicians, allows installation of new carpet tile, with modular and systems furniture in place and with minimal disruption to occupied work area. All furniture systems shall be lifted by equipment which has been structurally engineered for that particular furniture system. No crowbars or modified car jacks are to be used. No phones or electronic equipment shall be unplugged. After each installation session, work area must be returned to normal working order with all furniture in original location. Since work is being performed in an occupied work area, “low VOC” or “no VOC” adhesives are to be used. The GSA carpet contractor will be required to provide, upon request from government customers, an onsite demonstration of the equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement decisions.

Carpet Resources, Inc. GS‐27F‐0504H

Vinyl Installation Services Scope of Work
















USGBC LEED™ Credit Contributions: C/S Pedisystems® Entrance Flooring

LEED EQ Credit 5, Pollutant Source Control: Employ permanent entryway systems (grilles, grates, etc.) to capture and hold dirt, particulate, etc. from entering the building at all high volume entryways.

LEED MR Credits 4.1, 4.2 and 6, Recycled Content and Rapidly Renewable Material: C/S now o�ers recycled rubber and rapidly renewable teak, IPE, bamboo and cork tread insert options.

LEED EQ Credit 4.2, Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings: C/S o�ers environmentally-friendly (no VOC) powder coat �nishes that cost no more than standard anodized �nishes and are up to twice as abrasive resistant (testing available).

LEED EQ Credit 4.3, Low-Emitting Carpet: C/S PediTred® meets the Carpet and Rug Institute's standard for good indoor quality.

LEED ID Credit: C/S PediTred architectural mats have earned MBDC Cradle to Cradle: Silver Certi�cation.

C/S now o�ers a PVC-free hinge connector for PediTred products.

C/S sustainable products can be viewed by visiting www.buildinggreen.com or www.c-sgroup.com

©Copyright 2008 Construction Specialties, Inc.

In USGBC LEED™ 2.2 EQ Credit 5, the architect/designer is encouraged to specify permanent entryway systems (grilles, grates, etc.) to capture dirt and other particulates at all high volume entryways. The basis of the credit is to stop the dirt before it enters the building and contributes to poor indoor air quality. Specifying an entrance �ooring system will also reduce the amount of cleaning chemicals used and help prolong the life of other textile and hard surface �nishes in the building.

A C/S Pedisystem mat or grid not only �lls this need but goes way beyond, environmentally. Listed on the left are the ways that Pedisystem products can contribute toward your goal of LEED certi�cation.

Printed on Recycled Paperwith Soy Based Inks

6696 Route 405 HighwayMuncy, Pennsylvania 17756800-233-8493

G6LB

Installation InstructionsGridline G6 with LB Frame

1). Site PrepUse wood forms to prepare a recess in the concrete a minimum of 1-1/4” for1-1/8”Grille, 3/4” for 5/8”Grille and 1/2” for 3/8”Grille depth to final finished floorsurface.Recess should be made to overall size of unit, plus a 1/16” on all sides of the recess toallow for clearance.Ensure the frames exposed surface will be flush with the finished floor.After concrete has cured, remove the wood forms.(See Illustration A) below

2). Assemble FrameAssemble the level base frame. The ends of the frame pieces have been mitered, pre-

drilled and countersunk to allow for quick assembly.

3). Set FrameSet the frame assembly around the perimeter of the formed recess.(Illustration A)

Shim the frame as required 24” o.c. to elevate the frame assembly to finished floor height.

Before fastening, double check the finished floors surface height, and ensure that frame

assembly is both plumb and square.

Drill a hole using the 5/32” masonry bit into concrete using the pre-countersunk holes in the

frame.

Install 3/16” masonry anchor. (anchors and bit included in hardware package)

Clean the concrete recess to remove all dirt, oily film, and debris.

Illustration A

4). GroutGrout the concrete pit surface to bring bottom of recess flush with top of lower frame

leg using a waterproof self-leveling grout.(Illustration B)

Recommended brands:

Quikrete #1585 mixed with #8610 Acrylic Fortifier

For technical assistance, call Quikrete @ 800-282-5828, www.quikrete.com

VinylCrete with Acrylic Fortifier

For technical assistance, call UMACO Inc @ 978-453-8881 www.umaco.com

Pour and level grout using the legs within the frame opening as screed points.

IMPORTANT: THE BED SURFACE MUST BE

SMOOTH AND LEVEL TO ENSURE PROPER GRID

INSTALLATION, ALIGNMENT AND TO PREVENT

TRIPPING HAZARDS.

* Allow the grout material sufficient time to cure properly before inserting the

Gridline within the framed opening.

Illustration B

http://www.quikrete.com

http://www.umaco.com

5.) Gridline InstallationTrial fit the Gridline modules at locations indicated on shop drawings within the

frames, so each module is aligned and evenly spaced between perimeter frames and

adjacent modules. Mark all lock down fastener locations on the pit surface and on the

grid modules then remove all grid modules. Drill all fastener holes at marked

locations. (Note: surface lockdowns – 9/16” hole at 1-5/8” depth or hidden lockdowns-

3/8” hole at 5/8” depth). Install lead anchors. (Note: Use one of the screws to tighten

the lead shield before installing the grids) Attach all hidden lock down clips with cap

screw, flat washer and retaining washers attached to the gridline module at marked

locations. Repeat for all modules. Replace all modules at intended locations.

Use the 1/8” Hex tool (hidden lockdown) or Phillips drive (surface lockdown) to start

each fastener into each expansion anchor. Once all are engaged, snug all fasteners

tight. Starting from the center working out towards the perimeter in a rotating

manner. Repeat for all modules. See illustration C1 for Surface Lockdowns and

Illustration C2 for Hidden Lockdowns.

Illustration C1Illustration C2

6.) CompletionIt is necessary to cover the installation with ¾” plywood until all additional project work is

completed. This will protect the Gridline from potential abuse during the construction

phase. Damage occurring from inadequate protection during this phase may void the

manufacturer’s warranty.

7.) Care and Maintenance InstructionsManufacturer’s suggested safe rolling load for the Gridline G6 is 500# per wheel. Heavy loads

beyond this weight may damage the units, contributing to their premature failure or creating a

tripping hazard.

Clean the recess as frequently as necessary. This will prevent an excess buildup of dirt under

the grids.

Clean the grids, when cleaning the recess, using a power sprayer to wash and clean each

module. Remove all clogged or caked materials from within all aperture openings.

Replacement of the gridline modules, Replace each module to original position and engage all

fasteners prior to final tightening of each fastener. Cleaning enables Gridline to function as

intended. Call us at (800) 233-8493 (Muncy) or (888) 895-8955 (Canada) and our sales group

will assist you with special needs or conditions, loading considerations and installation related

issues.

kpoust

Stamp

DIM 'A'GRIDLINE WIDTH

DIM

'B'

GR

IDLI

NE

LE

NG

THTR

AFF

IC D

IREC

TIO

NDIM 'B'

GRIDLINE LENGTHTRAFFIC DIRECTION

DIM 'A'GRIDLINE WIDTH

1/16"[1.6mm]

1/2"[12.7mm]

.235"[5.97mm].145"

[3.68mm]

MASONRY LAG FASTENER(90H066004)24" (609.6mm) O.C.

SECTION Y-Y

SECTION X-X

TYPICAL PLAN VIEW 5/16"-18 UNC X 1-3/4" LG.S/S PHILLIPS FLAT HEADMACHINE SCREW (90H523002)

5/16" DIA. EXPANSION SHIELD(90H090004)

SURFACE HOLD DOWN24" [609.6mm] O.C.(PER MODULE)

3/8"[9.5mm]

1/8" [3.2mm]

1/16"[1.6mm]

S/S LEVEL BASEANGLE FRAME(16S001002)

LATEX SCREED

1/16" [1.4mm]

LATEX SCREED

NO. F&F RELEASE BYDATE

NO. REVISION BYDATE3/8" GRIDLINE WITH LEVEL BASE FRAME AND SURFACE LOCK DOWNSINSERT STYLE: N/A INSERT COLOR: N/A CATALOG NUMBER: G6 PART NUMBER:

*MAX. SINGLE GRID SIZE NOT TO EXCEED 8'-0"[2.438M] IN WIDTH (DIM 'A') OR 4'-0" [1.22M] INLENGTH (DIM 'B')

*ALL SURFACE WIRES AND SUPPORT BARS ARE ELECTRONICALLYRESISTANCE WELDED TOENSURE CORRECT WEIGHT BEARING PROPERTIES.

NOTES:*GRIDS SHALL BE ABLE TO SUPPORT A 500LB ROLLING LOAD.

* SURFACE WIRE SPACING PROVIDES A 57.7% EFFECTIVE OPEN AREA FOR DIRTAND MOISTURE REMOVAL.

*ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE CONTAINED IN THE LATEST C/S CATALOG ORAT C-SGROUP.COM AND ARE CONSIDERED PART OF THIS TRANSMITTAL.

LOCATION

PLE

AS

E V

ER

IFY

ALL QTY MARK # MODEL DIM 'A'

WIDTH LENGTHDIM 'B' REMARKSFRAME FINISH PROJECT:

LOCATION:

AGENT:CONTRACTOR:

DRG. BY: JOB NO.:DATE:SHT:

CIRRUS® HRC Square Lay-in, Tegularfine texture

CIRRUS Beveled Tegular with SUPRAFINE® 9/16″ Exposed Tee grid; SOUNDSOAK® Acoustical Walls

Detail and Grid Intersections

CIRRUS BeveledTegular

CIRRUS AngledTegular

CIRRUSBeveled Tegular withSUPRAFINE 9/16″Exposed Tee grid

CIRRUSAngled Tegular withPRELUDE® 15/16″Exposed Tee grid

Total Recycled Content: 83%

Pre-Consumer: 54%, Post-Consumer: 29%

Post consumer recycled content due to recycled ceilings fromthe closed-loop Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program.

CIRRUS® HRC Square Lay-in, Tegularfine texture

Physical DataMaterialWet-formed mineral fiber

Surface FinishFactory-applied latex paint

Fire PerformanceASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 surface burning characteristics.Flame Spread Index 25 or less.Smoke Developed Index 50 or less. (UL labeled)

ASTM E1264 ClassificationType III, Form 1, Pattern E IFire Class A

Sag ResistanceHumiGuard® Plus – superior resistance to sagging in high humidityconditions up to, but not including,standing water and outdoor applications.

LEED® is a registered trademark of the United States Green Building Council

No-Added FormaldehydeNo-Added Formaldehyde – free of formaldehyde-based resins.Outperform CHPS Section 01350requirements. (Independent testreports available upon request.)

Anti Mold/Mildew & BacteriaBioBlock® Plus contains an anti-microbial treatment and providesguaranteed resistance againstgrowth of mold/mildew and Gram-positive and Gram-negativeodor/stain-causing bacteria for 30 years.

Insulation ValueR Factor – 1.9 (BTU units) R Factor – 0.33 (Watts units)

BackloadingRecommendationContact TechLine for specific information

Weight; Square Feet/CartonSee product details at armstrong.com/ceilings

30-Year Performance Guarantee & Warranty InformationSee warranty details at armstrong.com/ceilings

Application ConsiderationsNot recommended for rooms containing MRI equipment

Recommended Suspension System

Items Suspension System533HRC, 535HRC, 15/16″ PRELUDE®

574HRC, 584HRC539HRC, 589HRC 9/16″ SUPRAFINE®

9/16″ TRIMLOK® Screw-Slot9/16″ SILHOUETTE® Bolt-Slot9/16″ INTERLUDE®

9/16″ SONATA™

Performance SelectionVisual Selection Dots represent highest level of performance.

UL ClassifiedAcoustics Fire Light Sag Anti- VOC Recycling

NRC CAC Resist Reflect Resist Microbial Formaldehyde Program DurableGrid Edge ItemFace Profile Number Dimensions

CIRRUS

15/16″ Square 574HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ BioBlock+ No-Added Yes StandardLay-in ● ● ● ● ● ●

533HRC 2′ x 4′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 Standard Standard● ● ● ● ●

9/16″ Beveled 589HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ StandardTegular ● ● ● ● ● ●


15/16″ Angled 584HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ StandardTegular ● ● ● ● ● ●


� Installations in Healthcare facilities need to meet HIPAA oral privacy requirements

LEED Credits Waste Recycled Local Renewable Low-Emitting Daylight

Energy Mgmt Content Materials Materials Materials & Views

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓+ ✓ ✓ ✓

Contact TechLineSM for LEED Information. 1-877-ARMSTRONG

PERF

ORMANCE

GU A R A N T E E

30year

TechLineSM / 1 877 ARMSTRONG1 877 276 7876

armstrong.com/ceilings (search: cirrus)CS-3859-1008

Typical Applications• Patient and exam rooms – assists in

addressing HIPAA requirements�

• Offices• Conference rooms• Department stores/retail

• Refined visual• Excellent sound absorption• 30-Year Limited System Warranty

against visible sag (excludes Items533HRC, 535HRC, 539HRC),mold/mildew and bacterial growth

Key Selection Attributes

White (WH)

Color

© AWI Licensing Company, 2008 • Printed in the United States of America

+ Credit is location dependent.

Tegular Natural Variations™, Constants™ & Bamboo

WOODWORKS®

WoodWorks Tegular with Lg 9512 Perforation in Natural Variations Dark Cherry Inset: WoodWorks Tegular Custom 2' x 4' with Rg 6003 Perforation in Natural Variations Maple

• 100% upward access• Edge banding for superior quality and aesthetics• Available with coordinating trims• Composite Class A fire performance• Custom veneers, perforations and sizes

available

K e y S e l e c t i o n A t t r i b u t e s• Rich, natural veneers• FSC-certified options available• California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliant• Five perforation options now available to enhance

acoustical performance and design aesthetics• Less expensive than custom millwork

Ty p i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s• Healthcare• Office• Education• Hospitality and retail• Transportation

V e n e e r S e l e c t i o n Due to printing limitations, shade may vary from actual product.

In addition to these standard options, there are additional veneers, perforations and sizes available as premium and custom options. Contact the Armstrong Architectural SpecialtiesProject Management Team for details at 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select prompts 1-1-4.

* A premium veneer option managed through ArchitecturalSpecialties due to the potential for significant color variationpanel to panel. Mininum order quantity and extended leadtime may apply.

** Perforations Rg 6011, Rd 6006, Lg 9508 and Lg 9512 are available in Natural VariationsBeech, Maple, Light Cherry, Dark Cherry and Bamboo Patina as standard options. These perforations are available in Bamboo Native and Constants finishes as premium options with extended lead times and minimum order quantities. To view more perforation information and build swatches in real time, visit armstrong.com/swatchit

Natural Variations (Real Wood Veneers)

Bamboo(Rapidly Renewable)

Constants (Real Wood Veneers)

Beech (NBE)

Light Cherry(NLC)

Maple (NMP)

Dark Cherry(NDC)

Patina(BAP)

Native*(BAN)

Maple(CMA)

Cherry(CCY)

Walnut(CWA)

P e r f o r a t i o n O p t i o n s ** (Actual 1:6 scale shown)

Round Straight – Rg 6006 (W2)

Round Straight – Rg 6011 (W4)

Round Diagonal – Rd 6006 (W3)

Oval Straight Slotted – Lg 9508 (W6)Oval Straight Slotted – Lg 9512 (W5)

Unperforated (W1)

3624 WW Tegular DS_310_New Template 2009 3/22/10 10:02 AM Page 63


armstrong.com/woodworksCS-3624-310

Tegular Natural Variations™, Constants™ & Bamboo

WOODWORKS®

AcousticsNRC CAC

Edge Item Dimensions FireProfile Numberw Nominal W x L x H Rating

WOODWORKS Tegular Unperforated

9/16" Square Tegular 5404W1_ _ _ 2' x 2' x 3/4" N/A 38 Class A●

WOODWORKS Tegular Perforated

9/16" Square Tegular 5404W2_ _ _ 2' x 2' x 3/4" 0.40** 28** Class A5404W3_ _ _ 0.40** 28**5404W4_ _ _ 0.65** 28**

●

5404W5_ _ _ 0.55** 28**5404W6_ _ _ 0.40** 28**

w When specifying or ordering, please include the appropriate color suffix (e.g., 5404W1 N D C)** Maximum NRC achieved with acoustical fiberglass infill (item 8200100). When infill is used, CAC is 28. For additional infill options, refer to the Acoustical Infill data page (CS-4172).For veneers, sizes and perforation patterns available as special order, call 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select options 1-1-4.NOTE: 4-carton minimum order quantity on all items.NOTE: Perforations Rg 6011, Rd 6006, Lg 9508 and Lg 9512 are available in Natural Variations Beech, Maple, Light Cherry, Dark Cherry and Bamboo Patina as standard options. These perforations areavailable in Bamboo Native and Constants finishes as premium options with extended lead times and minimum order quantities. To view more perforation information and build swatches in real time, visit armstrong.com/swatchit

A c c e s s o r i e s

P h y s i c a l D a t a

V i s u a l S e l e c t i o n P e r f o r m a n c e S e l e c t i o n Dots represent highest level of performance.

MaterialFire retardant particle board with face-cut veneers;FSC-certified options available. See CS-4014 fordetails, or visit armstrong.com/woodworksfsc.

Surface FinishClear or tinted semigloss coating

Fire Performance ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. HPVA Certified with audit program per ASTM E84.Flame Spread Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less.

ASTM E1264 ClassificationComposite – Fire Class A

WarrantyOne (1) year limited warranty. Details: armstrong.com/warranty

Application ConsiderationsVariation among panels may occur due to the natural characteristics of the wood and grain.

It is very important that WoodWorks panels are climatizedprior to installation. Relative humidity between 25% and55% and temperatures between 50˚F and 86˚F must bemaintained.

Seismic InstallationThese systems have been engineered, tested, and meet therequirements for applications in Seismic Design Categories D, E and F

Weight; Square Feet/CartonPanels – 2.75 lbs/SF; 16 SF/ctn4" trim – 44 lbs/ctn; 48 LF/ctn6" trim – 44 lbs/ctn; 32 LF/ctn

Item Number Description Dimensions Color Pcs/CtnNominal W x L x H

5479 BioAcoustic Infill Panel 2' x 2' x 5/8" Beige 12

8200100 Fiberglass Infill Panel 2' x 2' x 1" Black 12

5413W1_ _ _w 4" WoodWorks Trim with wood substrate 4" x 8' x 3/4" See Colors Above 6

5416W1_ _ _w 6" WoodWorks Trim with wood substrate 6" x 8' x 3/4" See Colors Above 4

5659W1 _ _ _w 4" WoodWorks Trim with aluminum substrate 4" x 10' See Colors Above 6

5660W1 _ _ _w 6" WoodWorks Trim with aluminum substrate 6" x 10' See Colors Above 6

7804BL Angle Molding 7/8" x 12' x 9/16" Black 2(recommended with trims)

w When specifying or ordering, include the color suffix that coordinates with your WoodWorks ceiling: (e.g., 5413W1 N M P)

Suspension Systems

9/16" Standard: Interlude®, Silhouette® Bolt-Slot, Sonata®, Suprafine®, Trimlok® Screw-Slot

LEED® CreditsEnergy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Certified Low Emitting

Mgmt Content Materials Materials Wood*

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔Location Dependent *Options Available

Acoustics Low Emittingor CHPS

✔

LEED for Schools

RecycledContent: 92%

Colors and Perforations

LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building CouncilAll other trademarks used herein are the property of AWI Licensing Company and/or its affiliates

© 2010 AWI Licensing Company • Printed in the United States of America

NV Beech (NBE)NV Maple (NMP)NV Light Cherry (NLC)

NV Dark Cherry (NDC)Constants Maple (CMA)Constants Cherry (CCY)

Constants Walnut (CWA)Bamboo Patina (BAP)Bamboo Native (BAN)

Unperforated (W1)Rg 6006 (W2)Rd 6006 (W3)

Rg 6011 (W4)Lg 9512 (W5)Lg 9508 (W6)

armstrong.com/greengenie

3624 WW Tegular DS_310_New Template 2009 3/22/10 10:02 AM Page 64

• Class A Fire performance• Custom veneer management available to

coordinate with millwork or other interior finishes. Custom panel sizes available, contact Architectural Specialties at 1 877 ARMSTRONG, options 1-1-4

K e y S e l e c t i o n A t t r i b u t e s

• Define spaces with warm natural wood• Concealed mounting hardware for a clean look

above and below• Adjustable to special heights and angles• Veneer edge banding for superior quality • 92% recycled content

Ty p i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s

• Healthcare• Office• Education• Hospitality and retail• Exposed structure areas

Canopies

WOODWORKS®

V e n e e r S e l e c t i o n Due to printing limitations, shade may vary from actual product.

WoodWorks Canopies 3' x 6' in Natural Variations™ Light Cherry

Custom Veneers Avai lable (par t ia l l i s t )These are a representation of some custom veneers used on recent projects. Additional customveneers and continuous upturn options are also available on WoodWorks Canopies.

* A premium veneer option managed throughArchitectural Specialties due to the potentialfor significant panel-to-panel color variation.Minimum order quantities and extendedlead times may apply.

Natural Var iat ions (Real Wood Veneers)

Light Cherry(NLC)

Maple(NMP)

Dark Cherry(NDC)

Patina(BAP)

Native*(BAN)

Bamboo(Rapidly Renewable)

Custom Anigre Quartered Figured

Custom Cherry

Quartered

Custom Sapele

Quartered

Custom African Mahogany

Quartered

Custom Red Oak

Rift

Due to the non-standard dimensions, finishes and performance features for WoodWorks Customsystems, please visit our website at armstrong.com/woodworks or call 1 877 ARMSTRONG andselect options 1-1-4 to work with the Architectural Specialties project management team.

WoodWorks Canopies in Custom Maple Quartered

4057 WW Canopies_909 10/1/09 3:20 PM Page 1


armstrong.com/woodworksCS-4057-909

Canopies

WOODWORKS®

P h y s i c a l D a t aMaterialFire retardant particle board with face-cut veneers

Panel ArcHill or Valley – 12' radius

Surface FinishClear or tinted semigloss coating

Fire Performance ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. HPVA Certified with audit program per ASTM E84.Flame Spread Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Index 50 or less.

ASTM E1264 ClassificationComposite – Fire Class A

WarrantyOne (1) year limited warranty. Details: armstrong.com/warranty

Weight2.5 lbs per SF

Application ConsiderationsVariation among panels may occur due to the natural characteristics of the wood and grain.

It is very important that WoodWorks panels are climatizedprior to installation. Relative humidity between 25% and55% and temperatures between 50˚F and 86˚F must bemaintained.

Installation ConsiderationWoodWorks Canopies require two peope to handle and install a panel safely. See installation instructions on website for details.

Design Considerations WoodWorks Canopies are not approved for exterior application. The WoodWorks Canopies cable hanging system must not hang from any commercial ceiling suspension system. The canopy must not be used to support any other material.

WoodWorks Canopies, as with other architectural features located in the ceiling plane, may obstruct or skew the existingor planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possiblydelay the activation of the fire sprinkler or fire detection system. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fireprotection engineer, NFPA 13, and their local codes for guidanceon the proper installation techniques where fire detection orsuppression systems are present.

Seismic InstallationThese systems have been engineered, tested, and meet the requirements for applications in Seismic Design Categories D, E and F

Suspension SystemHardware and 8' cables included in kit

LEED® CreditsEnergy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Certified Low Emitting

Mgmt Content Materials Materials Wood

✔ ✔ ✔Location Dependent


LEED for Schools


Item Shape Dimensions Fire RatingNumber*

WOODWORKS Canopies – Unperforated

5918W1_ _ _ Hill 72" x 36" x 3/4" Class A5920W1_ _ _ 96" x 48" x 3/4"

5919W1_ _ _ Valley 72" x 36" x 3/4" Class A5921W1_ _ _ 96" x 48" x 3/4"

* When specifying or ordering, include the appropriate three-digit color suffix (Ex: 5918W1N D C) with the item number.Note: For custom item details, contact the Architectural Specialties team at 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select options 1-1-4.

K i t C o m p o n e n t s

A c c e s s o r i e sItem DescriptionNumber

7006 Escutcheon Kit – Used when hanging canopy below an existing ceiling. 2 kits needed per canopy.

5947 16' WoodWorks Canopy Suspension Wire – 3/32" cables (4 wires per bag)

• 1 Pre-curved WoodWorks Canopy • Suspension Hardware and 8' cables (4 cables per panel)

NV Maple (NMP)NV Light Cherry (NLC)NV Dark Cherry (NDC)

Bamboo Patina (BAP)Bamboo Native (BAN)

Colors and Perforations

Perspective View: Plan & Elevation Views:Suspension Hardware:

V i s u a l S e l e c t i o n

LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building CouncilAll other trademarks used herein are the property of AWI Licensing Company and/or its affiliates

© 2009 AWI Licensing Company • Printed in the United States of America

4057 WW Canopies_909 10/1/09 3:20 PM Page 2

AXIOM®— Knife Edge®

Trim

The narrow Knife Edge profile accentuates the weightless appearance of floating ceiling clouds.

AXIOM-Knife Edge profile is made from extruded aluminum and offers precise detailing and quality. Axiom-Knife Edge with Tegular panel

Key Selection Attributes

• Unique profile provides a refined alternative to a traditional blunt 90-degreevertical trims

• Two profiles available:AXIOM-Knife Edge for traditional acoustical lay-in and tegular panels,as well as drywallAXIOM-Knife Edge forVector is specifically madeto work with the uniqueVector edge

• Extruded aluminum trim provides more crisp edge detailing compared to conventional roll-formed steel systems

• Compatible with Armstrongexposed suspension systems and Drywall GridSystems

• Colors coordinate with Armstrong ceiling and gridsystems; custom colors available

• Standard 90˚ factory bonded corners

• Factory corners available inconfigurations between 60˚ and 135˚ upon request

Axiom-Knife Edge for Vector with Vector panel

12"

AXIOM-Knife Edge Factory Bonded Inside Corner

AXIOM-Knife Edge Factory Bonded Outside Corner

Factory Bonded corners

T-Bar Connector Clip (AXTBC)

5-9/16"

2-5/16"

1/2"

Axiom-Knife Edge for Vector profile

6-3/16"

2-1/2"

Axiom-Knife Edge profile

AXIOM®— Knife Edge®

Trim

DetailsPhysical Data

MaterialTrim Channel: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063Hanging Clip: Commercial quality aluminum T-Bar Connector Clip: Commercial quality aluminumSplice Plate: Galvanized steelSurface FinishFactory-applied baked polyester paint finishCross Tee / Main Beam InterfaceFlush fitEnd detailSplice with set screwsWarranty10-year limited warranty

Color Selection

Alignment Clip (AXKEALIGN)

Splice Plate (AX4SPLICEB)

Recycled Content:

50%

Axiom-Knife Edge with drywall (Use withAX-V-TBC and AXDWT)

Visual Selection

ITEMNUMBER DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS

AXIOM - Knife EdgeAXKE2STR 10' Straight 120 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"AXKE90IC Inside 90˚ Corner 12 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"AXKE90OC Outside 90˚ Corner 12 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"

AXIOM - Knife Edge for VectorAXKEVE2STR 10' Vector - Straight 120 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16"AXKEVE90IC Inside 90˚ Corner 12 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16"AXKEVE90OC Outside 90˚ Corner 12 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16"

AccessoriesAX2HGC Hanging Clip —AXTBC T-Bar Connector Clip —

AX-V-TBC T-Bar Connector Clip —AX4SPLICEB Splice Plate —AXKEALIGN Alignment Clip —

AXDWT 10' Drywall Trim 120 x 1-3/4" Axiom-Knife Edge with AX2HGC for single panel

installation


armstrong.com/axiomCS-3528-209

AXIOM-Knife Edge Factory Bonded Inside Corner

AXIOM-Knife Edge Factory Bonded Outside Corner

135º Corner

60º Corner

Please Recycle © AWI Licensing Company, 2009

12"

STANDARD FINISHES■■ WH - White***■■ CR - Cream■■ HA - Haze■■ CM - Camel■■ PL - Platinum■■ BL - Tech Black■■ SA - Silver Satin■■ BB - Bright Brushed*■■ SG - Silver Grey■■ MY - Gun Metal Grey■■ PW - Pewter**■■ BZ - Bronze**■■ SL - Silver**■■ CP - Copper**■■ WK - Wolf**

■■ VA - Vanilla**■■ ST - Slate**

NEW POWDER-COATED FINISHES■■ CB - Carbon ■■ BC - Burnished Copper ■■ CT - Copper Black Texture ■■ FR - Forged Iron ■■ GR - Graphite ■■ MC - Mica ■■ NK - Nickel ■■ PR - Pewter Luster ■■ SV - Silver Slate ■■ SR - Steel Luster ■■ TC - Textured Carbon

NOTE: Items AXHGC, AX2HGC, AXSPLICE, AX4SPLICEB, AXTBC, AXPHANG58, AXPHANG118 are available in unpainted only.

** “S” Service items available only as special order*** Use White for field-painted options.

PROJECT NAME :

TYPE :

MODEL :

SUBMITTAL APPROVED BY :

DATE :

LumiLedge® Sheet Rock Cove System LLSR-FR7 Prefabricated Performance Cove System

PRODUCT | LL SERIES

HOW TO SPECIFY | Product Code

COVE DIMENSIONS

LLSR-FR7 Please specify run length.

Prefabricated cove is packagedin the following increments: — 40 ft per carton — 16 ft per carton

PRODUCT COVE LENGTHLLSR-FR7

INSTALLATION OVERVIEW

MATERIALS

SUPPLIED MATERIALS INCLUDE:extruded aluminum cove system which improves cove quality and reduces installation time

die-formed link brackets to ensure horizontal and vertical alignment

SUPPLIED BY OTHERS:not included - gypsum board, metal screws, corner bead for top and bottom corner or other cove enclosure materials must be supplied by others

screw requirements: 1/2 in. gypsum board - requires 1 in. screw (max.)5/8 in. gypsum board - requires 1 1/4 in. screw (max.)

*(cove dimensions represent the use of 5/8 in. gypsum board)

1. mount wall extrusion using no. 8 screws

2. link next extrusion 3. attach support bracket

4. fasten bottom horizontal gypsum

5. fasten face vertical gypsum

6. compound and apply corner beads

© ELECTRIX, INC. 45 SPRING STREET NEW HAVEN, CT 06519 203.776.5577 203.624.7545 [email protected] www.electrix.com

PATENT NO. 7,658,518

3"

7"

jessicaknight

Text Box

ADDITONAL PROJECT NOTES:

EDGEThe Most Complete Narrow Aperture Lighting System

Architect: Partners by DESIGN incorporated (Chicago, IL),Project: CDW Business Technology Center (Vernon Hills, IL)

EDGE INDOOR DIRECT, INDIRECT AND BI -DIRECTIONAL LUMINAIRE

EDGE Acrylic Lens (E4A), Denver, COEDGE is a narrow aperture linear lighting system designed for ambient, perimeter, and wall wash applications. The complete suite of products fills interiors with light, but imposes minimal impact on the architecture. Ceilings are left clean from bulky fixtures. Luminaires are now used to enhance the overall design. The simple linear form visually defines an austere spatial form.

Pendant Pipe (PP)

Wall Mount (WA)

Surface (S)

Regress Lens (R)

Snap-In Acrylic Lens (A)

Parabolic Louver (P)

Aircraft Cable (AC)

Open Uplight (O)

Asymmetric Uplight (WO)

Fixture Lengths

Grid Ceiling (G1, G9)1

Screw Slot Ceiling (GS)2

Flanged (FL)

Flangeless (NF)

T8 Lamps

T5/T5HO Lamps

Asymmetric Distribution (W)

RECESSED IN-WALL DIRECT

Wall Wash (WW)

Illuminated Connector (CL)

MR16MR16 Halogen Lamp

E2 E2-IWE4 EW EX2 EX33 EX42" wide 2" wide4" wide 4" wide 2" x 4-3/4" 3" x 3" 4" x 4-3/4"

1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8

2', 3', 4', 6', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

2', 3', 4', 6', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

1T5,1T5HO

2', 3', 4', 6', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

1T5,1T5HO

2', 3', 4', 6', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

1T5,1T5HO

1T5,1T5HO

1T5,1T5HO

1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

4', 8', 12'Individual or

Continuous Rows

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

Staggered Lamps (1 lamp)1T5,

1T5HO

3 3

1E4 and EW, individual units and continuous rows, will fall on-grid.


3

EDGE EDGE is the most complete narrow linear lighting system with the right set of options in lamps, mounting, ceiling trim, housing styles, shielding media and configurations to confront the demands of today’s architectural environments.

PRODUCT INDEX

DIRECT INDIRECT BI-DIRECTIONALEX44 EX2-N EX33-N EX4-N EX44-N EX2B EX4B4" x 4" 2" x 4-3/4" 3" x 3" 4" x 4-3/4" 4" x 4" 2" x 4-3/4" 4" x 4-3/4"

1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8


Continuous Rows

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows


Continuous Rows

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows


Continuous Rows

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

4', 8'Individual or

Continuous Rows

1T5, 1T5HO 1T5, 1T5HO 1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8

1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8

1T5, 2T5, 1T5HO, 2T5HO

1T8, 2T8

1T5, 1T5HO

1T5,1T5HO

1T5,1T5HO

Pendant Pipe (PP)

Wall Mount (WA)

Surface (S)

Regress Lens (R)

Snap-In Acrylic Lens (A)

Parabolic Louver (P)

Aircraft Cable (AC)

Open Uplight (O)

Asymmetric Uplight (WO)

Fixture Lengths

Grid Ceiling (G1, G9)1

Screw Slot Ceiling (GS)2

Flanged (FL)

Flangeless (NF)

T8 Lamps

T5/T5HO Lamps

Asymmetric Distribution (W)

Wall Wash (WW)

Illuminated Connector (CL)

MR16 Halogen Lamp

Staggered Lamps (1 lamp)



3

3Quick Ship available with Parabolic Louver (E4P) , Acrylic Lens (E4A), Wall Wash (EW), 4' Individual unjoinable units, 120 and 277 voltage, G1 and FL mounting, Standard White, Single and Dual Circuit.

www.pinnacle-ltg.com

EDGE EX is Pinnacle Lighting’s suspended and surface mounted version of the Edge recessed luminaire. EDGE EX offers multiple lighting distribution options and up to 4 different shielding selections.

www.pinnacle-ltg.com

EDGE EX Parabolic Louver (EX4-P) and EDGE EX Wall Wash (EX4-WW) Pinnacle Architectural Lighting Headquarters, Denver, CO

12655 East 42nd Avenue, Suite 50 Denver, CO 80239 Phone 303.322.5570 Fax 303.322.5568 February 2008.www.pinnacle-ltg.com

EDGE

Edge 4 Parabolic Louver(E4P) with MR16 lamp

Edge 2Parabolic Louver (E2P)

Edge Wall Wash (EW)

Edge EX2Acrylic Lens (EX2-A)

Edge EX4Wall Wash (EX4-WW)

Edge EX2Parabolic Louver (EX2-P)

Edge E4Acrylic Lens (E4A)

Edge 2Regress Lens (E2R)

Edge EX4 Indirect (EX4-N) with MR16 Lamp

Edge EX4Regress Lens (EX4-R)

Edge EX44Acrylic Lens (EX44-A)

Edge EX33Indirect (EX33-O)

Edge EX33Regress Lens (EX33-R)

Edge EX44 Regress Lens(EX44-R) with MR16 Lamp

Edge EX44 ParabolicLouver (EX44-P)

Edge 90 Degree Corner Edge Cross IntersectionEdge T Intersection Edge Illuminated Connector

Edge IN-line Straight Row Alignment System

PureFXTM is a revolutionary lighting system that

utilizes Ledalite’s MesoOptics® technology to purify

and control light. It offers the perfect blend of

brightness, control and energy efficiency – making

happier people and a healthier environment.

A typical recessed parabolic fixture offers

superior glare control, but it creates a

darker, cave-like environment with very

harsh shadows and dark walls.

Before

In nature, we are surrounded by a luminous environment.

Brightness is everywhere and on everything we can see or touch.

The purity and beauty of surrounding natural brightness makes

us feel happier and more comfortable.

This leads to a strong desire to create similarly pure, luminous

environments indoors. However, when brightness is introduced to

interior environments, it is imperative that it be controlled. If it is not,

brightness can have a detrimental effect and actually start to cause

visual discomfort.

PureFX offers a similar level of glare

control, but increases brightness levels

throughout the space. This leads to softer

shadows and a brighter space that is still

visually comfortable.

After

1

PureFXTM 2X2

Exceptional lighting performance and

styling – An ideal product for creating

distinct architectural rhythm. Blends in

well with many architectural ceiling types.

Ideal for offices, schools, healthcare

facilities, and other public spaces.

Photometry

Lamping Options

Dimensions

23 13/16"

4 3/8"

23 11/16"

4 3/8"

24"

3 T5/T5HO2 TT5 (40/55W)

0

90

180

90

4545

135 135

4

2 T8 3 T82 T5/T5HO1 TT5 (40/55/80W)

1 T5/T5HO 1 T82 T5/T5HO 2 T8

PureFXTM 1X4

Sleek and sophisticated – Perfect for

creating elongated rhythmic patterns or

install in continuous rows to create clean,

luminous lines throughout a space. Ideal

for offices, schools, healthcare facilities,

and other public spaces.

Photometry

0

90

180

90

4545

135 135

Lamping Options

Dimensions

11 13/16"

4 3/8"

47 11/16"

4 3/8"

48"

6

Lamping Options

Photometry

Dimensions

3 T5/T5HO2 T5/T5HO1 T5HO

3 T82 T8

0

90

180

90

4545

135 135

0

90

180

90

4545

135 135

1 T81 T5/T5HO

Lamping Options

Photometry

Dimensions

23 13/16"

4 3/8"

47 11/16"

4 3/8"

48"

5 13/16"

4 7/16"

47 11/16"

4 7/16"

48"

8

9

Purify I Control I Sustain

Ledalite MesoOptics® technology offers a revolutionary way to

purify and control light – allowing for the creation of vision-friendly

lighting solutions that are exceptionally energy efficient.

MesoOptics is produced in a manner similar to the holograms that appear on most

credit cards. Using this process, tiny microstructures no greater than 5 microns in

size are applied to a substrate such as acrylic, polycarbonate, or glass. It is these

microstructures that create the highly-unique characteristics of lighting control

that MesoOptics provides.

ControlMesoOptics can constrain

or disperse lighting for

optimum control and

uniformity. It also allows

for the creation of highly-

controlled beam patterns

and has the ability to redirect

light into desired angles.

PurifyMesoOptics removes striations and hot spots

from lighting sources, creating smooth gradients

of pure, white light free from color shifts.

SustainMesoOptics is a highly efficient material that allows

up to 95% of the light that enters to pass through.

This enables the creation of highly energy-efficient

lighting products that are environmentally

responsible and visually healthy.

100%

60%

Traditional Diffuser

100%

95%

MesoOptics

10

MesoOptics® technology allows PureFXTM to have the best possible

combination of lighting control and brightness – with efficiencies that

are almost 20% higher than other recessed lighting products.

Outstanding Lighting Control and Efficiency

Dramatically Reduced Energy Consumption

Typical Parabolic

The sharp cut-off

provides good glare

control, but creates

dark walls and

ceilings, leading to

darker cave-like

environments.

People and objects

have a direct view

of the lamp.

Efficiency: 81%

GlareZone

GlareZone

GlareZone

A small amount of

controlled brightness

is introduced to the

walls and ceiling,

creating a brighter,

more pleasant

environment without

causing unwanted

glare.

Batwing lighting

distribution creates

less brightness

directly below the

fixture, minimizing

veiling reflections.

No direct view of

lamp.

Typical Recessed Indirect

“Blob-Like” lighting

distribution leads to

uncomfortable and

distracting veiling

reflections.

A large amount of

uncontrolled

brightness in the

glare zone leads

to discomfort and

eye strain.

Efficiency: 61% Efficiency: 62 %

0.00

0.20

0.40

0.60

0.80

1.00

1.20

1.40

0.79 W/sq.ft.

1 TT5 (55W)

2X2 - PureFX

Light level achieved

52.3 footcandles

1.22 W/sq.ft.

2 TT5 (40W)

2X2 - Parabolic Troffer


63.5 footcandles

1.22 W/sq.ft.

2 TT5 (40W)

2X2 - Recessed Indirect


57.1 footcandles

TM

11

When attempting to

achieve a light level of

50 footcandles, most

2x2 recessed lighting

systems will require

two 40W TT5 lamps.

PureFX requires only

a single 55W TT5 lamp

to meet this lighting

level - a 35% reduction

in lighting-related

energy costs.

Applications Guide

Maintenance

PureFX is quick and easy

to install and maintain.

You can access both the

lamp and ballast from

below the ceiling so you

never have to worry about

moving or damaging

ceiling tiles. No tools

are required. Push up on the center channel

and then slide to the side where

the hinges are located.

Gently lower the door in a

downward direction. The hinge

system allows you to access the

inside without having to get off

the ladder.

The hinges swing out and away

providing easy access

to the lamp and ballast

compartment.

PureFXTM comes with a range of lamping options to suit a wide variety of lighting and energy efficiency needs.

The chart below illustrates some of the options and their typical results.

Light Levels (average footcandles) Power Density

1 T5HO (54 W)

1 T8 (32 W)

PureFX 1X4

1 T5HO (54 W)

2 T8 (32 W)

PureFX 2X4

1 TT5 (55 W)

1 TT5 (40 W)

PureFX 2X2

8X8 Centers 8X10 Centers

PureFX 1X4

PureFX 2X4

PureFX 2X2

1 TT5 (55 W)

1 TT5 (40 W)

1 T5HO (54 W)

1 T8 (32 W)

1 T5HO (54 W)

2 T8 (32 W)

37.3 fc

0.55 W/sq.ft.

52.3 fc

0.79 W/sq.ft.

30.2 fc

0.46 W/sq.ft.

42.3 fc

0.66 W/sq.ft.

26.8 fc

0.46 W/sq.ft.

48.8 fc

0.92 W/sq.ft.

0.38 W/sq.ft.

39.5 fc

0.77 W/sq.ft.

57.6 fc

0.86 W/sq.ft.

58.1 fc

0.89 W/sq.ft.

46.5 fc

0.72 W/sq.ft.

46.7 fc

0.74 W/sq.ft.

21.7 fc

12

Order Guide

PureFXTM SpecificationsHousing Construction

Die-formed, post-painted, 22 gaugecold-rolled steel (New York City version is20 gauge). Wire entrances are positionedon the side of the housing to allow easywiring access for the installer. Multiplewire entrances are available (top or side)to allow continuous row mounting offixtures. Optional frame restraint isavailable to provide additional support tothe optical frame.

Optical System

Optical assembly consists of flat acrylicpanels and extruded curved acrylic lens.A protected MesoOptics® film layer createsoptimal light distribution and high efficiency.The optical frame ends are constructedfrom die-formed cold-rolled steel

assembled together with extruded aluminumprofiles in a sturdy frame. The frame is hinged toallow easy access to the inside of the fixture.Maintenance can be performed from below theceiling without the need of tools. No hardwareis visible.

Finish

Housing and frame are post-painted, high-qualitypowder coat. Available in white only.

Ballast

Ballasts are electronic and available in 120V,277V or 347V. Optional 50/100 or 30/60/100step-dimming ballasts can be used to providemulti-level switching.

Mounting

Fixture is compatible with most ceiling types suchas Flat T-Grid and Slot T-Grid systems. Integratedbend-out tabs are provided for different T-bar grid

heights. Optional drywall kits are available fornon-accessible ceilings. Use screws or hanger wire(supplied by others) to secure fixture to structure.

Air Return

Air return option available.

Wiring

Flexible cable whips supplied in 9' or 12' lengthsfor standard master/satellite configurations.

Weight

2x2 Maximum 23 lbs., 2x4 Maximum 40 lbs.,1x4 Maximum 30 lbs., 6"x4 Maximum 18 lbs.

Approvals

Certified to UL & CSA Standards.

City of Chicago Approved CCEA(Housing Option - C).

Designed to comply with NYC code requirements(Housing Option - N).

2X4

23 13/16"

4 3/8"

47 11/16"

4 3/8"

48"

2X2

23 13/16"

4 3/8"

23 11/16"

4 3/8"

24"

Lamping Options

1X4

11 13/16"

4 3/8"

47 11/16"

4 3/8"

48"

1 T5/T5HO 1 T8

2 T5/T5HO 2 T8

Lamping Options

6"X4

1 T81 T5/T5HO

Lamping Options

5 13/16"

4 7/16"

47 11/16"

4 7/16"

48"

Series Size Version Configuration Lamp Type Lamp Wattage Housing94 - PureFX 22 - 2x2 ST - Standalone B - TT5 1 - 1 Lamp 14 S - Standard (22 ga.)

14 - 1x4 SMS - Standalone Master/Satellite* T - T8 2 - 2 Lamp 17 N - New York (20 ga.)24 - 2x4 CR - Continuous Row H - T5HO 3 - 3 Lamp 24 C - Chicago Plenum64 - 6"x4 CMS - Continuous Row Master/Satellite* F - T5 28 T - Standard w/frame restraint

3240545580

* NOTE: Two fixtures with a shared ballast.

D1 - Standard T-Grid(9/16" or 15/16")

D2 - Slot T-Grid (sits flushwith bottom of T-Bar)*

A1 - Air Return onStandard T-Grid*

A2 - Air Return onSlot T-Grid*

* NOTE: Option is not availablein 1x4 or 6"x 4 sizes.

Ceiling

Integration

Air

Return

D1 - STANDARD

T-GRID 9/16"

OR 15/16"

D2 - SLOT

T-GRID 9/16"

2 TT5 (40/55W)

2 T8

3 T83 T5/T5HO

2 T5/T5HO1 TT5 (40/55/80W)

Lamping Options

2 T5/T5HO

1 T5HO 3 T83 T5/T5HO

2 T8

13

A1/A2 -

AIR RETURN

Ledalite is a Philips group brand

19750 - 92A AvenueLangley, British ColumbiaCanada V1M 3B2

T 604.888.6811F 800.665.5332E [email protected]

© 2008 Philips Group. All rights reserved. These products may be protected by applicable utility and design patents and patents pending including, but not limited to: US Patents 6,037,593; 6,007,217; 5,834,765; 5,727,870; 5,624,202; 5,253,036; D496,121; D556,358; D572,858 and/or Canadian Patents 2,175,554; 2,175,553; 2,238,557 and corresponding foreign patents. Ledalite will aggressively defend all of its intellectual property. Due to continuing product improvements, Ledalite reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

L0153 Rev 3.0

FEATURESMATCHING FIXTURES

page 128 www.ocl.com

NIMBUS™ SCONCE

NS2-S1SA-12-GW-BALNS1-S1SA-12-GW-BNP

• The Nimbus sconce is an adaptation of a theater fixture designed in the 1920s.

• A small acrylic dome or flat lens accents this deco-style metal trim ring.

• Spun from solid, non-ferrous 0.040” thick brass or 0.064” thick aluminum.

• Thermally formed acrylic ranges from 3/16” to 1/4” thick, depending on size.

• Virgin white acrylic is UV stable and UL-94 HB Flame Class rated.

• OCL metal finishes are applied by hand and receive a protective clear coat lacquer.

• 21 standard powder coat paints offered, however all RAL colors available.

• Contact factory for additional modifications or options.

page 194 page 388

12”

4” 12”FIXTURE WEIGHT 5 LBS

12”

3.5”FIXTURE WEIGHT 5 LBS

12”

SERIES HANGING SYSTEM SIZE DIFFUSER FINISH LAMPING (PHOTOMETRIC TEST #) VOLTAGE OPTIONS

SPECIFY CATALOG CODE

SC

ON

CE

– – – – – – –____________ ___________________ ____ _____________ _____________ _______________ ____ ___________________________

page 129Phone: 314.863.1895 | Fax: 314.863.3278 | www.ocl.com

PHOTOMETRIC INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT WWW.OCL.COM

FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION GO TO WWW.OCL.COM AND SEARCH: NIMBUS SCONCE

SAMPLE CODE: NS2–S1SA–12–GW-BAL–2QD13–120–ULD

GW GLOSS WHITE ACRYLIC

MW MATTE WHITE ACRYLIC

PAL POLISHED ALUMINUM

BAL BRUSHED ALUMINUM

PTD PAINTED – SPECIFY CODE (EX. BKP FOR BLACK PAINT, SEE PAGE 492 FOR PAINT OPTIONS)

12 120

277

347

12”

1QD13 1@13W QD

2QD13 2@13W QD (13787.0)

EMR REMOTE MOUNT EMERGENCY

FUS FUSED

ULD UL DAMP LABEL

• Fixture mounts to a standard 4” J-box (supplied by others).

• Bodine® emergency ballast available, standard with remote mounted test switch and indicator light.

• Integral HPF electronic fluorescent ballast with Class A sound rating (3-5 year ballast warranty depending on ballast specification).

• Fixture is ADA compliant.

• For photometric data, please visit www.ocl.com.

• For lamp and base information, see pages 496-505 in the reference section.

• For specific mounting instructions, please contact factory.

• Five year product warranty.

NS2(DOME DIFFUSER)

NS1(FLAT DIFFUSER)

S1SA INDOOR ADA COMPLIANT SCONCE

Submitted by One Source Associates

Job Name: NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210

Catalog Number:D6LED4-6D9LED350K8MFC-WT

Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

DATE: TYPE:

FIRM NAME:

PROJECT:

A Division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc.

In a continuing effort to offer the best product possible we reserve the right to change, without notice, specifications or materials that in our opinion will not alter the function of the product.Web: www.prescolite.com Tech Support: (888) 777-4832

6" LED DownlightD6LED4120V, 277VHigh Output

Ceiling Cutout: 61/4"Maximum Ceiling Thickness 11/4"

For conversion to millimeters, multiply inches by 25.4

Not to Scale

ARCH-LED-007

CATALOG NUMBER: EXAMPLE: D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18

APPLICATIONS: Architektu-r D6LED Series is a 6” specification grade LED downlight that combines superior brightness control with energy savings and low maintenance costs. Suitable for a variety of commercial, retail, and institutional applications with ambient temperature up to 35°C (95°F)* during operation.*HDM option suitable for 35°C with no through wiring or 25°C with through wiring. Optional optical lens provide choice of spot, medium, or wide distribution to allow for higher ceiling applications.

HOUSING:One-piece 18 gauge non-corrosive steel platform. Pre-wired J-box with snap-on cover for easy access. Snap-in connection from driver compartment allows easy installation of light engine/trim assembly without tools above or below the ceiling and can be upgraded to accommodate technology improvements. Approved for 8 (4 in/4 out) No. 12 AWG conductors rated for 90°C through wiring. Thermally activated insulation detector.

REFLECTOR:High purity spun aluminum self-flanged reflector with iridescence suppressed Alzak anodized finish. Provides 45° cutoff for a glare-free ceiling appearance. Slots in reflector for added heat dissipation and optimal LED life. Cable attachment for added safety and ease of installation.

LED LIGHT ENGINE:High output LED light engine equipped with (10) high brightness white LEDs (2700K, 3500K, 4000K, or 5000K) on a metal clad circuit board. Secured to an integral die cast aluminum heat sink for excellent thermal management. System designed for optimal life and lumen maintenance (70% average lumen maintenance at 50,000 hours).

Optics: Vacuum metalized injection molded optical reflector features (10) parabolic LED modules with Prescolite’s patent pending American Matte™ finish to produce uniform illumination. Also available in spot, medium, or wide distribution to best fit higher ceiling applications.

Reflector/light engine assembly attaches with a single tamper resistant screw (tool provided) for added security and ensures ceiling appearance free of sagging throughout life of the product.

LED DRIVER:

Energy efficient solid state constant current electronic driver with 50,000 hour minimum anticipated life. Meets UL Class 2, inherent short-circuit protection, self limited, overload protected. Flicker-free dimming options available to 1%.

CERTIFICATIONS:CSA certified to US and Canadian safety standards. Suitable for damp locations. Wet locations consult technical support. Approved for through wiring. Non-IC rated.

ENERGY STAR® qualified for 120V standard (no dimming) operation with 80+ CRI in 3500K, 4000K, and 5000K only.WARRANTY:3 year warranty.

14 3⁄8"

7 1⁄4"

5 3⁄4" 7"

11 3⁄4"

14 3⁄8"

16 1⁄4"

1 1⁄4"

❑ D6LED46" High Output LED Housing

HOUSING/ LED LED GENERATION VOLTAGE TRIM COLOR TEMP CRI BEAM ANGLE REF. FINISH REF. COLOR REF. OPTIONS ACCESSORIES

❑ 6D9LED46" Open Reflector/ Light Engine Assembly

❑ BlankVacuum metalized reflector with 45º cutoff

❑ SP18Lensed optic with 18º spot distribution and Zet painted faceplate

❑ MD25Lensed optic with 25º medium distribution and Zet painted faceplate

❑ FL35 Lensed optic

with 35º wide distribution and Zet painted faceplate

❑ BlankClear Alzak

❑ CGChampagne Gold Alzak

❑ BLBlack Alzak

❑ WEWheat Alzak

❑ LWLight Wheat Alzak

❑ PWPewter Alzak

❑ WH1

White Paint

❑ WTWhite Trim

❑ TRGTrim Ring Gasket (factory installed)

❑ B24Set of two(2) 24" bar hangers for T-bar ceilings

❑ B6Set of two (2) bar hangers for ceiling joist up to 24" centers

❑ Signos6Architectural decorative trim elements. Refer to specification sheets ARCH-SIG-001–004

❑ SCA6Sloped ceiling adapter for 6" housings. Specify degree of slope and type of ceiling. Slope ceiling adapter and housing must be installed at the same time.

❑ Blank120V

❑ 277V277V

HSG OPTION

❑ HDMLutron Hi-Lume® dimming to 1%, 3-wire line voltage or EcoSystem™ digital controls

❑ 27K2700 Kelvin

❑ 35K3500 Kelvin

❑ 40K4000 Kelvin

❑ 50K5000 Kelvin

❑ 7Nominal 70+ CRI


❑ BlankSpecular

❑ SSSemi-Specular

❑ MFCAmerican Matte™

1Requires WT option

❑ D6LED46" High Output LEDHousing

❑ 6D9LED46" OpenReflector/Light Engine Assembly

❑

❑❑ 35K3500Kelvin

❑ 0

❑ 8Nominal80+ CRI

p❑ MFC

American Matte™

❑ WTWhite Trim

❑




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

Web: www.prescolite.com Tech Support: (888) 777-4832 Phone (864) 678-1000

Copyright ©2010 Prescolite, Inc., a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. ARCH-LED-007 3/4/10

PHOTOMETRIC DATA

DRIVER DATA D6LED4 D6LED4 277V D6LED4HDM D6LED4277VHDMInput Voltage 120V +/- 10% 277V +/- 10% 120V 277VInput Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60Hz 50/60HzInput Current 0.24A (0.4A max) 0.13A (0.5A max) 0.27A 0.14AInput Power 28W (34W max) 28.5W (40W max) 33W 35WConstant Current Output 1400mA 1400mA 1400mA 1400mAPower Factor ≥0.90 0.78 at 277V >0.90 0.93THD <20% <20% <20% <20%EMI Filtering FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class B Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class AOperating Temperature -40ºC to 60ºC -40ºC to 60ºCDimming 3 wire line voltage 3 wire line voltageOver-voltage, over-current, short-circuit protection or EcoSystem to 1% or EcoSystem to 1%

Architektur - 6" D6LED4 Downlight

NOTESRefer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).

LUMEN MULTIPLIER 2700K 3500K 4000K 5000K

70+ CRI 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.4180+ CRI 0.89 Baseline 1.10 1.15

Note: Multipliers shown are based on LED manufacturer data and can be used to approximate the lumen intensity of a fixture with different LED color temperature and/or CRI with identical optical configuration and reflector finish. For reference only.

LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/SQ. METERAngle in Vertical Average - 0º

45° 906755° 28765° 075° 085° 629

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-30 719 69.50-40 928 99.80-60 1029 99.50-90 1034 100.090-180 0 0.00-180 1034 100.0

D6LED4-6D9LED435K8LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array Nichia 3500K Mid CRISystem Wattage: 27.7Fixture delivered lumens: 1034 Fixture Efficacy: 37Spacing Criteria: 0.9

CANDELA DISTRIBUTION

DEG CANDELA LUMENS0 11215 1047 98

15 935 26425 824 35735 331 20945 117 9555 3 565 0 275 0 185 1 290 0 0

Test No. 2889Tested at 25ºC Ambient in accordance to IESNA LM-79-2008

% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

80% 70% 50% 30% 10% 20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 113 111 108 106 111 108 106 104 104 102 101 101 99 98 97 96 95 2 108 103 99 95 105 101 97 94 98 95 92 95 92 90 92 90 88 3 102 96 90 86 100 94 89 86 91 88 84 89 86 83 87 84 82 4 97 89 83 79 95 88 83 79 86 81 78 84 80 77 82 79 76 5 92 83 77 73 90 82 77 72 80 76 72 79 75 71 77 74 71 6 87 78 72 67 85 77 71 67 76 70 67 74 70 66 73 69 66 7 82 73 67 63 81 72 67 62 71 66 62 70 65 62 69 65 61 8 78 69 62 58 77 68 62 58 67 62 58 66 61 58 65 61 57 9 74 65 59 54 73 64 58 54 63 58 54 62 57 54 61 57 54 10 71 61 55 51 70 61 55 51 60 54 51 59 54 51 58 54 51

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio

COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method

D6LED4-6D9LED435K8 Test No. 2889


45° 341055° 124265° 25975° 21285° 0


D6LED4-6D9LED435K8FL35LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Flood LensSystem Wattage: 27.6Fixture delivered lumens: 1116 Fixture Efficacy: 40Spacing Criteria: 0.6



15 1651 45125 624 29035 171 11145 44 3655 13 1265 2 275 1 185 0 090 0 0




% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 114 112 110 108 112 110 108 106 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 2 109 105 102 99 107 104 106 98 100 98 96 97 95 93 95 93 92 3 105 99 95 92 103 98 101 91 95 92 89 93 90 88 91 89 87 4 101 94 89 86 99 93 97 85 91 87 84 89 86 83 87 85 82 5 97 89 84 81 95 89 93 80 87 83 80 85 82 79 84 81 78 6 93 85 80 76 91 84 90 76 83 79 76 82 78 75 80 77 75 7 89 81 76 72 88 81 87 72 79 75 72 78 74 72 77 74 71 8 86 78 73 69 85 77 85 69 76 72 69 75 71 68 74 71 68 9 83 74 69 66 82 74 82 66 73 69 66 72 68 65 71 68 65 10 80 71 66 63 79 71 80 63 70 66 63 69 65 63 69 65 62

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


D6LED4-6D9LED435K8FL35 Test No. 2768

1200

800

400

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º

2400

1600

800

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

Web: www.prescolite.com Tech Support: (888) 777-4832701 Millennium Blvd., Greenville, SC 29607 U.S.A. Phone (864) 678-1000Copyright ©2010 Prescolite, Inc., a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. ARCH-LED-007 3/4/10

PHOTOMETRIC DATA

NOTESRefer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).


45° 317755° 124265° 13075° 085° 0


D6LED4-6D9LED435K8MD25LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Medium LensSystem Wattage: 27.8Fixture delivered lumens: 1128Fixture Efficacy: 41Spacing Criteria: 0.4



15 1635 45425 471 22335 126 8245 41 3255 13 1265 1 075 0 085 0 090 0 0

4200

2800

1400

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º




% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 115 112 110 108 112 110 108 107 106 105 100 103 101 100 99 98 98 2 110 106 103 100 108 105 102 99 102 99 195 99 97 95 96 95 93 3 106 101 97 94 104 100 96 93 97 93 90 95 93 90 93 91 89 4 102 97 92 89 101 95 91 88 93 90 86 92 89 86 90 87 85 5 99 92 88 84 97 91 87 84 90 86 83 88 85 83 87 84 82 6 95 89 84 81 94 88 83 80 86 83 79 85 82 79 84 81 79 7 92 85 80 77 91 84 80 77 83 79 76 82 79 76 81 78 76 8 89 82 77 74 88 81 77 74 80 77 73 80 76 73 79 76 73 9 87 79 75 71 86 79 74 71 78 74 71 77 73 71 76 73 71 10 84 76 72 69 83 76 72 69 75 71 69 75 71 69 74 71 68

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


D6LED4-6D9LED435K8MD25 Test No. 2755


45° 201555° 76465° 25975° 085° 0

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-30 1205 94.60-40 1247 97.80-60 1273 99.90-90 1274 100.0

D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Spot LensSystem Wattage: 27.8Fixture delivered lumens: 1274 Fixture Efficacy: 46Spacing Criteria: 0.2



15 1516 45025 347 17135 65 4145 26 1955 8 765 2 175 0 085 0 090 0 0




% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 115 113 111 110 113 111 109 108 107 106 105 103 103 102 100 99 99 2 112 108 105 103 110 107 104 102 104 101 100 101 99 98 98 97 96 3 108 104 101 98 107 103 100 97 100 98 96 98 96 94 96 94 93 4 105 100 97 94 104 99 96 93 97 94 92 95 93 91 94 92 90 5 102 97 93 90 101 96 93 90 95 91 89 93 90 88 92 89 88 6 100 94 90 87 99 93 90 87 92 89 86 91 88 86 90 87 85 7 97 91 87 85 96 91 87 84 90 86 84 89 86 84 88 85 83 8 95 89 85 82 94 88 85 82 88 84 82 87 84 82 86 83 81 9 93 87 83 80 92 86 83 80 85 82 80 85 82 80 84 81 80 10 91 85 81 78 90 84 81 78 84 80 78 83 80 78 82 80 78

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18 Test No. 2754

12000

8000

4000

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º

Architektur - 6" D6LED4 Downlight



Catalog Number:EPC22-224G-DL-LUTRONECOSYSTEM BALLAST-F5830Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

EXAMPLE EPC22-224G-CV-EPU-F5835ORDERING INFORMATION

1 Where available.

Damp Label - standard

CONSTRUCTION

Luminaire housing, end caps, and reflectors are die-formed code-gauge cold-rolled steel. Frameless optics system hinges from either side for easy access to lamps and electrical components. Mechanical light trap prevents light leaks. Latches are spring loaded.

FINISH

All visible parts are custom formulated soft, non-glare high-reflectance white powder coat finish, painted after fabrication.

SHIELDING

Three different lens shapes provide a choice of fixture aesthetics. Lenses are high transmission extruded acrylic.

INSTALLATION

An access plate is furnished with each recessed fixture for fast wiring connections without the necessity to open the fixture or wireway.

LABELS & ELECTRICAL

All luminaires are listed with UL and bear UL recessed fixture labels. Approved for CUL. Completely wired with standard class “P”, thermally protected, auto re-setting, HPF, CBM ballast. Sound rated A. All ballast leads extend a minimum of 6" through the access opening. NEC/CEC-compliant ballast disconnect is standard except with optional emergency battery pack. Damp Label is applied as standard.

CEILING COMPATIBILITY

Luminaire is available to fit exposed grid ceilings, or hard ceilings when a flange kit is ordered. Some options may increase fixture depth. For information on compatibility with specific ceilings, or where plenum depth is a problem, contact your Columbia Lighting representative. Four integral T-bar clips are standard.

FEATURES

visual comfort

energy savings opportunities2 ratio meets the most restrictive lighting power

density codes

and electrical from below the ceiling

– – ––– – –EPC 22 2

NO. OF LAMPS2 Two

SIZE 22 2' × 2'

BALLASTE Electronic T8, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Instant Start

ED Electronic T8, T5 Dimming, Programmed Start1

ESD Electronic T8, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Step Dimming, Programmed Start

ELW Electronic T8, 0.77 Ballast Factor, Low Wattage, Instant Start

EHL Electronic T8, 1.18 Ballast Factor, High Wattage, Instant Start

E104 Electronic T8, 1.04 Ballast Factor, Instant Start

ESD104 Electronic T8, 1.04 Ballast Factor, Step Dimming, Programmed Start

EP Electronic T5, T5HO, 1.0 Ballast Factor or T8, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Programmed Start

EP95 Electronic T5, 0.95 Ballast Factor, Programmed Start


EP115 Electronic T5, 1.15 Ballast Factor, Programmed Start


ETT Electronic Twin Tube, Instant Start (specify voltage)

EPTT Electronic Twin Tube, Programmed Start

VOLTAGE120 120V

277 277V

347 347V1

U 120V/277V

LAMPSFO730 30K 70CRI T8 Lamps

Installed

FO735 35K 70CRI T8 Lamps Installed





F5830 30K 80CRI T5 or T5HO Lamps Installed



FTT830 30K Twin Tube Lamps Installed



OPTIONSC388 3-Wire Flex

C488 4-Wire Flex

C588 5-Wire Flex

EL Emergency Battery Pack (specify voltage)

GLR Fast Blow Fuse

GMF Slow Blow Fuse

CSA UL listed or CSA certified for Canada

LAMP TYPE14 2' T5: 14 Watt

17 2' T8: 17 Watt

24 2' T5HO: 24 Watt

40TT 40 Watt Twin Tube Compact, 2G11 Base

MODELEPC e∙poc™ Full

Distribution Luminaire

ACCESSORIESFK22 2' × 2' Single

Flange Kit

FKCR Flange Kit Row Adaptor

CEILING TYPEG Grid

SM Surface Mount

For hard ceilings use flange kit.

SHIELDINGCV Curve Profile

DL Delta Profile

SH Shield Profile

© 2008 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Specifications subject to change without notice.

701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Tech Support 864.678.1668 / Website www.columbialighting.com

EPC22-22' × 2' High Efficiency, Full Distribution Luminaire / 2 T8, T5, or TT Lamps

RECESSED/ARCHITECTURAL / EPC22-2Page 1/2 Rev. 08/12/08

Catalog No.

Project Name Type

Date

PROJECT INFORMATION

EPC e∙poc™ FullDistribution Luminaire

2 Two

24 2' T5HO: 24 Watt

22 2' × 2' G Grid

DL Delta Profile

U 120V/277V

F5830 30K 80CRI T5 or T5HO LampsInstalled

24 G DL U F5830

LUTRON ECO SYSTEM BALLAST

LUTRON ECOLUTRON ECO SYSTEM BALLAST–––––




Type:

P10-68755

24"

33/8"

24"

24"

Side End

Side End

FKCR

NOTE: All dimensions are in inches; dimensions and specifications are subject to change without notice. Please consult factory or check sample for verification.

CEILING COMPATIBILITY

Type G

FK22 Flange Kit

PHOTOMETRIC DATA

DIMENSIONAL DATA

Flange kit cut out dimension for single unit only: 243/8" × 243/8"

For flanged fixtures in row configurations, the FKCR adapter bracket kit is required in addition to the FK22 kit. Order one less FKCR than the total number of fixtures in row. (Example: Row of two, order (2) FK22 & (1) FKCR)

Row cut out dimensions using FK22s & FKCR adapters: Width 243/8", Length [24" × (# in row)] + 3/8". Example: (24" × 2) + 3/8" = 483/8"

For lay-in installation in exposed grid ceilings. Maximum tee widths of 1" and maximum tee heights of 2" allowed.

For hard ceiling applications, order FK22 flange kit. Flange kit wires directly into concealed ceiling opening for a clean, finished appearance.

Test 15106 Test Date 8/7/08

Test 15109 Test Date 8/8/08

450

9000 15 30 45

90

75

Horiz 0-1800.0 45.0 90.0

60

350

7000 15 30 45

90

75

Horiz 0-1800.0 45.0 90.0

60

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY

Zone Lumens Lamp Fixt.

0-30 677 19.3 25.2

0-40 1125 32.1 41.8

0-60 2065 59.0 76.8

0-90 2690 76.9 100.0

0-180 2690 76.9 100.0

RC 80 70 50 0

RW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 0

RC

R

1 83 80 76 73 81 78 75 72 74 72 70 64

2 75 69 63 59 73 67 62 58 65 60 57 53

3 69 60 54 48 67 59 53 48 57 51 47 44

4 63 53 46 41 61 52 45 40 50 44 40 37

5 57 47 40 35 56 46 40 35 45 39 34 32

6 53 42 35 30 51 42 35 30 40 34 30 28

7 49 38 31 27 48 38 31 26 36 31 26 24

8 45 35 28 24 44 34 28 23 33 27 23 22

9 42 32 25 21 41 31 25 21 31 25 21 19

10 40 29 23 19 39 29 23 19 28 23 19 17

COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION (%)

RCR = Room Cavity Ratio

RC = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance RW = Wall Reflectance

Luminaire EPC22-224G-DL-EP

EPOC Troffer Recessed 2 × 2 2-lamp with two opal delta lenses

Ballast ICN-2S24

Ballast Factor 1.00

Lamp F24T5HO

Lumens per Lamp

1750

Watts 52

Mounting Recessed

Shielding Angle 0° = 90 90° = 90

Spacing Criterion

0° = 1.26 90° = 1.36

Luminous Opening in Feet

Length: 1.83 Width: 1.83 Height: 0.00

INDOOR CANDELA PLOT

ENERGY DATA

Total Luminaire Efficiency 76.9%

Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 52

IESNA RP-1-1993 Compliance Non-Compliant

ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Non-Compliant

Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens

$4.62 based on 3000 hrs. and $0.08 per KWH

LUMINAIRE DATA AVG. LUMINANCE (Candela/Sq. M.)0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0

Av

era

ge

Lu

min

an

ce A

ng

le

0 2726 2726 2726 2726 2726

30 2676 2717 2806 2876 2899

40 2627 2694 2824 2945 2987

45 2586 2668 2827 2991 3050

50 2540 2635 2835 3055 3155

55 2482 2589 2858 3200 3334

60 2398 2539 2918 3323 3368

65 2289 2487 3050 3217 3187

70 2124 2425 2960 2894 2801

75 1900 2434 2670 2434 2335

80 1629 2277 2166 1944 1832

85 1217 1696 1438 1143 1033

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY

Zone Lumens Lamp Fixt.

0-30 517 18.8 25.3

0-40 859 31.2 42.1

0-60 1575 57.3 77.1

0-90 2043 74.3 100.0

0-180 2043 74.3 100.0

RC 80 70 50 0

RW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 0

RC

R

1 81 77 74 71 79 75 72 70 72 70 67 62

2 73 67 61 57 71 65 60 56 63 59 55 51

3 66 58 52 47 64 57 51 47 55 50 46 42

4 61 51 45 40 59 50 44 39 48 43 39 36

5 56 46 39 34 54 45 38 34 43 38 33 31

6 51 41 34 29 50 40 34 29 39 33 29 27

7 47 37 30 26 46 36 30 26 35 30 25 24

8 44 34 27 23 43 33 27 23 32 27 23 21

9 41 31 25 21 40 30 25 20 30 24 20 19

10 39 29 23 19 38 28 22 18 27 22 18 17

COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION (%)

RCR = Room Cavity Ratio

RC = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance RW = Wall Reflectance

Luminaire EPC22-217G-DL-E104U

EPOC Troffer Recessed 2 × 2 2-lamp with two opal delta lenses

Ballast B232IUNV104-A

Ballast Factor 1.04

Lamp F17T8

Lumens per Lamp

1375

Watts 36

Mounting Recessed

Shielding Angle 0° = 90 90° = 90

Spacing Criterion

0° = 1.25 90° = 1.36

Luminous Opening in Feet

Length: 1.83 Width: 1.83 Height: 0.00

INDOOR CANDELA PLOT

ENERGY DATA


Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 59

IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Non-Compliant

Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens


LUMINAIRE DATA AVG. LUMINANCE (Candela/Sq. M.)0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0

Av

era

ge

Lu

min

an

ce A

ng

le

0 2086 2086 2086 2086 2086

30 2038 2075 2141 2201 2219

40 1997 2048 2152 2253 2287

45 1968 2027 2155 2286 2336

50 1930 2005 2160 2335 2415

55 1883 1973 2169 2432 2544

60 1826 1929 2211 2513 2552

65 1742 1894 2289 2396 2373

70 1635 1842 2199 2133 2058

75 1478 1838 1950 1763 1701

80 1277 1703 1573 1407 1333

85 996 1254 1033 811 738

© 2008 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Specifications subject to change without notice.

701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Tech Support 864.678.1668 / Website www.columbialighting.com

EPC22-22' × 2' High Efficiency, Full Distribution Luminaire / 2 T8, T5, or TT Lamps

RECESSED/ARCHITECTURAL / EPC22-2Page 2/2 Rev. 08/12/08




Type:

P10-68755

® SPECIF ICAT ION SUBMITTAL Page

Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:

EcoSystem® Five Control Input Digital Dimming Ballasts

EcoSystem Ballasts 1 11.03.08

EcoSystem Multiple Control Input Ballasts

Digital electronic dimming ballasts maximize the

benefi ts of a lighting management system. EcoSystem

Ballasts offer 100% to 10% dimming; ideal for use

where saving energy, increasing fl exibility, and

maximizing productivity are the goals of the lighting

design.

Features

• Continuous, fl icker-free dimming from 100% to 10%

• Provides power for and responds to one occupancy

sensor, one photo sensor, and one personal control

input (infrared receiver or wallstation)

• Communicates status and sensor inputs over the

EcoSystem Bus

• Programmed rapid start design ensures full rated

lamp life while dimming and cycling

• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without fl ashing to

full brightness

• Low harmonic distortion throughout the entire

dimming range

• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast does not

interfere with infrared devices

• End-of-lamp-life protection circuitry ensures safe

operation throughout entire lamp life

• Ultra-quiet operation

• Nonvolatile memory restores all ballast settings after

power failure

• Ballasts maintain consistent light output for linear

lamp lengths (i.e. 4 ft., 3 ft., 2 ft. have same relative

output)

• 100% performance tested at factory

EcoSystem case type G

EcoSystem case type J




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



Specifi cations

Standards

• California Energy Commission Listed

• UL Listed (evaluated to the requirements of UL935)

• CSA certifi ed (evaluated to the requirements of

C22.2 No. 74)

• NOM Listed for 32 W T8 Ballasts

• S Mark Certifi ed

• Class P thermally protected

• Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard

• Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements for

EMI/RFI emissions

• Meets ANSI C62.41 Category A surge protection

standards up to and including 4 kV

• Manufacturing facilities employ ESD reduction

practices that comply with the requirements of

ANSI/ESD S20.20

• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2000

Performance

• Operating Voltage: 120, 220/240, 277 V at 50 or

60 Hz

• Grounding: ballast and fi xture must be grounded for

proper dimming

• Dimming Range: 100% to 10% measured relative

light output

• Lamp Starting: programmed rapid start

• Lamp Current Crest Factor: less than 1.7

• Light Output Variation: Constant ±2% light output for

line voltage variations of ±10%

• Lamp Life: Average lamp life meets or exceeds

specifi ed lamp ratings

• Power Factor: 0.95 minimum

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20%

• Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient

• Maximum Inrush Current: 3 A per ballast at 277 V ,

7A per ballast at 120 V

• Class 2 Output: +20 V , 50mA maximum (one

daylight sensor, one keypad and one occupancy

sensor can be connected)

Environment

• Minimum lamp starting temperature: 50 °F (10 °C)

• Relative humidity: less than 90% non-condensing

• Sound Rating: inaudible in a 27 dB ambient

• Maximum ballast case temperature: 75 °C (167 °F)

Ballast Wiring & Mounting

• Ballast is grounded by a mounting screw to the

fi xture

• Terminal blocks on the ballast accept the following

wire gauges:

Power Wiring, Lamp Wiring, and EcoSystem Bus:

only one #18 AWG solid per terminal

Class 2 Sensors:


• Only one wire per terminal

• Class 2 sensor wiring must be separated from all

power and Class 1 wiring, consult all applicable

local and national codes

• Ballast mounts using two screws (or sheet metal

feature and one screw) within a fl uorescent fi xture

• Wiring from the ballast to lamp sockets shall not

exceed 7 ft. for T8, T5, and T5HO lamps

• Wiring from the ballast to lamps sockets shall not

exceed 3 ft. for T5 Twin Tube lamps

Lamp Seasoning

Refer to lamp manufacturer for lamp seasoning

requirements prior to dimming




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear and U bend T8 Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)

SystemEffi cacy(lm/W)

BallastEffi cacyFactor

RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F32T8

(48 in.)

3 EC5 T832 G UNV 3L G 277

240

120

0.31

0.35

0.72

86.5

84.0

85.9

0.85

0.85

0.85

7650

7650

7650

88

89

89

0.98

1.01

0.99

0.94

0.97

0.95

EC5 T832 G UNV 317L G 277

240

120

0.41

0.47

0.95

105.7

106.5

106.8

1.17

1.17

1.17

10,530

10,530

10,530

100

99

99

1.11

1.10

1.10

1.06

1.05

1.05

2 EC5 T832 G UNV 2L G 277

240

120

0.22

0.25

0.49

59.6

57.6

58.8

0.85

0.85

0.85

5100

5100

5100

86

89

87

1.43

1.48

1.45

0.91

0.94

0.93

EC5 T832 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.21

0.25

0.49

57.4

59.0

59.1

0.85

0.85

0.85

5100

5100

5100

89

86

86

1.48

1.44

1.44

0.95

0.92

0.92

1 EC5 T832 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.13

0.26

31.6

31.0

31.3

0.85

0.85

0.85

2550

2550

2550

81

82

81

2.69

2.74

2.72

0.86

0.87

0.87

F25T8

(36 in.)

2 EC5 T825 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.18

0.20

0.41

48.9

49.0

49.0

0.85

0.85

0.85

3665

3665

3665

75

75

75

1.74

1.73

1.73

0.87

0.87

0.87

1 EC5 T825 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.10

0.11

0.23

27.6

27.0

26.9

0.85

0.85

0.85

1828

1828

1828

66

68

68

3.08

3.15

3.16

0.77

0.79

0.79

F17T8

(24 in.)

2 EC5 T817 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.13

0.15

0.31

36.2

37.0

37.0

0.85

0.85

0.85

2380

2380

2380

66

64

64

2.35

2.30

2.30

0.80

0.78

0.78

1 EC5 T817 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.08

0.09

0.17

20.6

20.0

20.1

0.85

0.85

0.85

1190

1190

1190

68

60

70

4.13

4.25

4.23

0.70

0.72

0.72




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 Lamps

Lamp No. of Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F35T5

(57.1 in.)

1 EC5 T535 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.15

0.18

0.35

42.0

42.3

42.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

3650

3650

3650

87

87

87

2.38

2.38

2.38

0.83

0.83

0.83

F28T5

(45.2 in.)

2 EC5 T528 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.23

0.27

0.54

64.5

65.0

65.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

5800

5800

5800

90

89

89

1.55

1.54

1.53

0.87

0.86

0.86

1 EC5 T528 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.14

0.27

32.6

32.9

32.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

2900

2900

2900

89

88

88

3.07

3.04

3.04

0.86

0.85

0.85

F21T5

(33.4 in.)

2 EC5 T521 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.17

0.20

0.39

46.0

47.2

47.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

4200

4200

4200

91

89

89

2.17

2.12

2.12

0.91

0.89

0.89

1 EC5 T521 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.09

0.11

0.22

25.8

25.8

25.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

2100

2100

2100

81

81

81

3.88

3.88

3.88

0.81

0.81

0.81

F14T5

(21.6 in.)

2 EC5 T514 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.14

0.28

32.8

33.3

33.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

2700

2700

2700

82

81

81

3.05

3.00

3.00

0.85

0.85

0.85

1 EC5 T514 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.07

0.08

0.16

19.0

19.2

19.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

1350

1350

1350

71

70

70

5.26

5.21

5.21

0.74

0.74

0.74




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 HO Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F54T5

(45.2 in.)

2 EC5 T554 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.40

0.50

0.99

110.1

119.0

119.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

10,000

10,000

10,000

91

84

84

0.91

0.84

0.84

0.98

0.91

0.91

1 EC5 T554 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.21

0.24

0.48

56.5

58.0

57.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

5000

5000

5000

88

86

86

1.77

1.73

1.73

0.96

0.93

0.93

F39T5

(33.4 in.)

2 EC5 T539 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.30

0.35

0.70

83.0

84.0

84.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

7000

7000

7000

84

83

83

1.20

1.19

1.19

0.94

0.93

0.93

1 EC5 T539 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.16

0.18

0.37

43.3

44.0

44.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

3500

3500

3500

81

80

80

2.31

2.27

2.27

0.90

0.89

0.89

F24T5

(21.6 in.)

2 EC5 T524 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.45

54.8

54.0

53.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

4000

4000

4000

73

74

74

1.82

1.85

1.86

0.89

0.89

0.89

1 EC5 T524 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.11

0.12

0.24

30.0

28.8

28.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

2000

2000

2000

67

69

69

3.33

3.47

3.47

0.80

0.83

0.83




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for T5 Twin Tube Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

FT55

(20.7 in.)

2 EC5 T555 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.40

0.46

0.92

110.8

110.4

110.4

0.9

0.9

0.9

8640

8640

8640

78

78

78

0.81

0.82

0.82

0.99

0.90

0.90

1 EC5 T555 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.46

55.4

55.2

55.2

0.9

0.9

0.9

4320

4320

4320

70

70

70

1.62

1.63

1.63

0.89

0.90

0.90

FT50

(22.5 in.)

2 EC5 T550 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.36

0.42

0.84

99.7

100.8

100.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

8000

8000

8000

80

79

79

1.00

0.99

0.99

1.00

0.99

0.99

1 EC5 T550 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.45

55.4

54.0

54.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

4000

4000

4000

72

72

74

1.81

1.85

1.85

0.90

0.93

0.93

FT40

(22.5 in.)

2 EC5 T540 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.27

0.32

0.64

74.8

76.8

76.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

6200

6200

6200

83

81

81

1.34

1.30

1.30

1.07

1.04

1.04

1 EC5 T540 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.16

0.18

0.36

44.3

43.2

43.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

3100

3100

3100

70

72

72

2.26

2.31

2.31

0.90

0.93

0.93

FT39

FT36

(15.5 in.)

2 EC5 T536 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.26

0.31

0.61

72.0

73.2

73.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

5700

5700

5700

79

78

78

1.39

1.37

1.37

1.00

0.98

0.98

1 EC5 T536 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.14

0.17

0.33

38.8

39.6

39.6

1.0

1.0

1.0

2850

2850

2850

74

72

72

2.57

2.53

2.53

0.93

0.91

0.91




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



G Case Dimensions

A = 9.5 in. (241 mm)

B = 8.9 in. (226 mm)

C = 7.1 in. (180 mm)

D = 1.0 in. (25 mm)

E = 2.38 in. (60 mm)

G Case

EcoSystem Ballast Case Dimensions

G case ballasts ship with 36 in. leads for lamp connections

and 18 in. leads for Hot, Neutral, E1 and E2 connections

J Case

J Case Dimensions

A = 18.0 in. (457 mm)

B = 17.68 in. (449 mm)

C = 6.82 in. (173 mm)

D = .394 in. (10 mm)

E = 1.0 in. (25 mm)

F = 1.18 in. (30 mm)

ABC D

E

A

B

C DE

F




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T8, T5, T5 HO

Wiring to One Lamp (J case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

Blue

Red

Wiring to Two Lamps (J case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

Blue

Red

Yellow

Wiring to Two Lamps (G case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

N/CN/C

Blue

Red

Yellow

Wiring to Three Lamps (G case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

B/WB/W

Blue

Red

Yellow

Striped

NOTICE

• Maximum ballast to lamp socket lead length is 7 ft. (2 m)

• Wire colors shown are labeled on the ballast, but may vary depending upon fi xture construction




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T5 Twin-Tube

Wiring to One Lamp

Wiring to Two Lamps

BLUBLU

REDRED

NOTICE



BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

Blue

Red

Yellow

Blue

Red




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: EcoSystem Bus

EcoSystem Bus Overview

• The EcoSystem Bus wiring (E1 and E2) connects

the digital ballasts together to form a lighting control

system

• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital

ballasts, 32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors,

and 64 wallstations or IR receivers

• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity

insensitive and can be wired in any topology

• An EcoSystem Bus Supply provides power for the

EcoSystem Bus and supports system programming

• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by

using the EcoSystem Programmer

EcoSystem Bus Wiring

• Ballast EcoSystem Bus terminals only accept one

#18 AWG solid wire

• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Ballast

and EcoSystem Bus Supply is OFF when wiring

• Connect the two conductors to the two Digital Ballast

terminals E1 and E2 as shown

• Using two different colors for E1 and E2 will reduce

confusion when wiring several ballasts together

• The EcoSystem bus may be wired Class 1 or Class 2.

Consult applicable electrical codes for proper wiring

practices

Notes

• The EcoSystem Bus Supply does not have to be

located at the end of the Digital Loop

• E1 and E2 wires are not polarity sensitive

• EcoSystem Bus length is limited by the wire gauge

used for E1 and E2 as follows:

Wire Gauge Bus Length (max)#12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)

#14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)

#16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)

To the EcoSystem

Bus Supply & up

to 64 total ballasts

Ballast Terminals

Ballast Terminals

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Class 2 Sensors

Electrical Contractors and Engineers:

• Always follow applicable national and local electrical

code requirements when connecting circuits to

EcoSystem devices

• All fi eld installed Class 2 wiring must be separated

from line voltage wiring by at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)

• Some local electrical codes require Class 2 wiring to

be separately routed in a metal conduit

• Ballasts Class 2 Sensor terminals only accept

#22 AWG solid conductors

Lutron Requires:

• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate.

• Where separation is not possible, use a 600 V

insulated cable with an internal shield. Connect the

shield to ground to provide better noise immunity for

low voltage circuits

• Refer to Application note #142 for additional

information

Fixture Manufacturers:

• UL 1598 6.17.1 allows:

Factory installed power limited wiring and branch

circuit wiring that come in random contact within

the luminaire shall have insulation rated for the

maximum voltage that exists in any of the circuits.

(EcoSystem ballast circuits require minimum 600 V

insulated wire)

• UL 1598 6.17.2.1 requires:

Luminaires designed for the fi eld installation of

power limited circuits shall be provided with a

means of segregating or separating the fi eld-installed

power limited circuit wiring from the branch circuit

wiring within the luminaire (see UL 1598 6.17 for

details)

Lutron Requires:

• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate








Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Daylight Sensor

Wiring to a Daylight Sensor

• Sensor wiring summary:

Sensor Wire Ballast Terminal Terminal ColorRed

Black

White

Yellow

+20 V

Common

IR

Daylight

Red

Black

White

Yellow

• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital

Ballast is OFF when wiring.

• Connect the four conductors to the four Digital

Ballast terminals as shown.

• Daylight sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m)

of the ballast.

• Ballast Class 2 terminals only accept one #22 AWG

solid wire.

Notes

• Consult the daylight sensor specifi cation sheet to

properly locate the sensor.

• Do not place the sensor above pendant fi xtures,

directly below lighting fi xtures, or within skylight

wells.

• When wiring both a wallstation and daylight sensor

to one ballast, only connect the IR wire (white) from

the keypad, cap off the white wire from the daylight

sensor.

• All sensor and wallstation wiring is Class 2. Follow all

applicable national and local codes for proper circuit

separation and protection.

+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon

Class 2(#22 AWG Solid)

Occ

G Case Terminals

J Case Terminals

Daylight Sensor

#22 AWG solid only

#22 AWG solid only

Daylight Sensor




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Occupancy Sensor

Wiring to a Lutron Occupant Sensor (LOS-XX)



Black

Blue

+20 V

Common

Occ

Red

Black

Blue


Ballast is OFF when wiring

• Connect the three conductors to the three ballast

terminals as shown

• Occupant sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m)

of the ballast


solid wire

Notes

• Occupant sensors from other manufacturers may be

used with EcoSystem ballasts if the sensor meets

the following criteria:

Vin = +20 V , current draw less than 35 mA

• If other manufacturer’s occupant sensors are used

terminal colors and sensor wire colors may not

match




+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals

#22 AWG solid only

Occupant

Sensor

#22 AWG solid only

G Case Terminals

Occupant

Sensor




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams (continued)

Wiring to an IR Receiver and Wallstation

• Wiring summary:

Sensor Wire Ballast Terminal Terminal Color

Red

Black

White

+20 V

Common

IR

Red

Black

White



• Connect the three conductors to the three Digital

Ballast terminals as shown

• Receiver must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) of the

ballast


solid wire

Notes

• Only one wallstation or IR receiver can be wired to a

digital ballast

• If a daylight sensor and wallstation/IR receiver are

connected to one ballast, do not connect the

daylight sensor’s IR output




+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

#22 AWG solid only

G Case Terminals

IR Receiver

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals

#22 AWG solid only

IR Receiver

Wallstation

Wires to Digital Ballast




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Multiple Devices

Multiple Sensors with One Ballast

• EcoSystem ballasts accept wiring for one daylight

sensor input, one occupant sensor input and one IR

input (wallstation or IR receiver)

• EcoSystem daylight sensors have IR outputs that

allow the device to operate as a programming port.

In applications where a daylight sensor and

wallstation are wired to the same ballast, do not

connect the white wire of the daylight sensor to

the ballast. The wallstation operates as the

programming port through its integral IR receiver

• Use the chart below as a guide for wiring multiple

devices to a ballast

How to Use the Chart

Connect a senor to a ballast from the “Devices” column (in bold). Along

the selected device row, are “Y’s” and “N’s”. Where a “Y” is placed, the

device at the top of that column can also be connected to the same

ballast. An “N” indicates no connection allowed.

Devices Daylight sensor

(with IR)

Occupant sensor

Wallstation or

IR receiver

Daylight Sensor (no IR)

Daylight sensor

(with IR)Y N N

Occupant

sensorY Y Y

Wallstation or

IR ReceiverN Y Y

Daylight sensor

(no IR)N Y Y

Example: When a Daylight Sensor with its internal IR are connected to a ballast, then only an occupancy sensor can be added for the system to properly function.

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Line Voltage Dimmers

EcoSystem Ballasts and 3-wire dimmers

• Lutron 3-wire dimmers only control the ballast they

are wired to; EcoSystem does not support grouping

of 3-wire control input.

3-Wire Control Wiring



• Wire as shown

Line input Connects to

Hot Dimmer Black Wire

Neutral Dimmer White Wire

Dimmer wire Connects toYellow Ballast Orange (DH)

Red Ballast Black (HOT)

White Ballast White (NEU)

Green Earth Ground

• EcoSystem ballast line voltage and 3-wire input

terminals only accept one #18 AWG solid wire.

Emergency and 3-wire

• EcoSystem ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer

should not be used for emergency/egress lighting

unless an external emergency ballast is used in the

fi xture. See Lutron Ap. Note #50.

• EcoSystem ballasts may be used for emergency/

egress lighting when controlled by a Lutron dimming

panel (GP); where the panel is a dedicated

emergency panel.

Notice

3-Wire control turns off digital ballasts when the

control is in the off position. The digital ballast

inputs: daylight sensor, wallstation, occupant sensor,

and IR receiver will not function when the digital

ballast is turned off

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

LUTRONLUTRON

3-Wire Dimmer

Green

Ground

Red

Yellow

White

Neutral

Hot / Black

White

Ora

ng

e

Bla

ck




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



Attention Electricians and Fixture Manufacturers

Ballast/Socket Leads

Lead lengths from ballast to socket must not exceed

7 ft. (2 m) for linear lamps (T5, T5HO, T8). Lead

lengths must not exceed 3 ft. for T5 twin tube

lamps.

Lamp Sockets

Lamp sockets as per IEC 60400 are required to

ensure positive lamp-pin to socket contact.

Mounting for T5 and T5HO Lamps

Mount lamps 3/8 in. ± 1/8 in. away from the

grounded metal surface.

Mounting for T8 & T5 Twin Tube Lamps



Having a lamp too close to the grounded metal will

reduce lamp life. Having a fl uorescent lamp too far

away from the grounded metal will make the lamp

fl icker or not turn on at all.

Lamp Seasoning

Consult lamp manufacturer’s recommendations on

lamp seasoning prior to dimming

Further Information

For further information please visit

www.lutron.com/ecosystem or contact our 24-hour

Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466



Catalog Number:PLK-12-2T5-CM48-OA-LUTRONECOSYSTEM BALLAST-MW-SGL-F5835

Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

Plank is constructed of a heavy 20-gauge steel body with a 97⁄8" wide by 2" high profile in hous-ing lengths of 4', 8', or 12' lengths. Fixtures are available with up to three T8, T5, or T5HO lamps in cross section. An optional perforated pattern on either side of the shielding may be ordered (see ordering information below). Modular mounting points maintain convenient, predictable locations. The exact shape of the housing is maintained by the use of a patented inner die-cast plate at each fixture end (patent 6,796,676 B2) throughout the run to prevent snaking. The housing is designed to wrap around the plate and secures on top with concealed screws to ensure housing tolerances are consistent.

Housing and all painted parts are treated with a multi-stage phosphate prior to finish. Parts are then finished with a white powder coat for maxi-mum consistent coverage and longevity. Other colors may be specified; refer to page MTX-1 or contact your local Alera Lighting representative.

Plank includes both direct and indirect lighting elements. Shielding for the direct element may be selected as a white cross baffle with opal overlay (WCB), regressed perforated panel (RPF), flat perforated panel (FPF), opal acrylic lens (OA), acrylic pattern 12 lens (A12), or semi-specular parabolic louver (LD). For a dramatic touch, colored lensing material may be selected as an overlay; contact factory.

The standard distribution for Plank has approximately 20-30% down light. Optical covers can be used to customize the distribution. Our (CLC) Center Lamp Cover may be selected as an option to direct 100% of the center lamp light down. This is ideal for use with multi-purpose applications such as classrooms.

Plank is designed for ceiling suspension with an aircraft cable mechanism. To maintain consistent, predictable mounting points, fixtures use an aircraft cable yoke mounting mechanism from two points at each hanging location. An adjustable aircraft cable of varying lengths is supplied (see ordering information below). The end of the cable barrel screws into a standard 1⁄4 20 bolt brought down from the ceiling. Cover plates are provided to shield the ceiling cutout. A straight (standard) or optional coiled cord is available for feed locations as is a feed canopy. All fixtures are suspended in modular increments and must be supported at each fixture housing end. Refer to the Plank TID sheet for actual hanging points with specific row information.

All fixtures bear appropriate UL or CUL labels. Fixtures are prewired with electronic T8, T5, or T5HO ballasts and are available in 120 or 277 volt. Some ballast options are available as dual-voltage 120/277 volt. All fixtures are wired for single circuit operation. Additional circuits can be supplied as an option on the two and three lamp configurations; see ordering information below.

Catalog No.

Project Name Type

Date

120V- 277V

120V

277V

347V

One T8 Lamp

Two T8 Lamps

Three T8 Lamps

One T5 Lamp

Two T5 Lamps

Three T8 Lamps

One T5HO Lamp

Two T5HO Lamps

Three T5HO Lamps

Specify entire row

Solid (Std.)

Perforated Strip

Horizontal Slot Strip

Vertical Slot Strip

Custom Laser Cut Design Strip

Left/Right Switching(2-Lamp only)*

Inboard/Outboard Switching (3-Lamp only)*

Emergency Battery Pack (Small case only)

Fast Blow Fuse

GMF Slow Blow Fuse

UL listed or CSA certified for Canada

Dust Cover (T8 only)

Center Lamp Cover(T8 only)

White Cross Baffle

Regressed Perforated

FPF Flat Perforated

Opal Acrylic Lens

Pattern 12 Thick Acrylic Lens

Low Iridescent Semi-Specular Parabolic Louver

Plank Rectangular Housing

18" (Std.)

24"

36 36"

48"

Other lengths available on request.

*Switching configuration must be provided.

Adj. Aircraft Cable Mount

See HGR-1 for other hanging methods.

Flat End Cap (Std.)

Single or Row Individual Lengths. Note: Fixtures in rows are modular and will be identified as components within the row by their individual lengths.Lengths for this product are: 4 = 4' 8 = 8' 12 = 12'

E Electronic, Instant Start, (Std. for T8)

EP Electronic, Programmed Start (Std. for T5 and T5HO, optional for T8)

Unless specified, Alera will use fewest ballasts possible.

Matte White (Std.)

ZET Silver

See MTX-1 for other color selections.Plank

Rectangular Housing

12

Two T5 Lamps

Adj. Aircraft CableMount

48"

Opal Acrylic Lens

Matte White(Std.)

SINGLE

F5835-LAMPS

pLUTRON ECO

SYSTEM BALLAST

12 2T5

Solid (Std.)

48 OA MW SGL F5835LUTRON ECOLUTRON ECO

SYSTEM BALLAST




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 207 7.1 7.40-40 327 11.3 11.70-60 529 18.2 18.90-90 620 21.4 22.1

90-120 774 26.7 27.790-130 1138 39.2 40.690-150 1767 60.9 63.190-180 2179 75.1 77.90-180 2799 96.5 100.0

1 89 85 81 78 78 75 72 70 58 56 54 182 81 74 69 64 71 66 61 57 51 48 45 163 74 65 59 53 65 58 53 48 45 41 38 144 67 58 51 45 60 51 45 41 40 36 32 125 62 51 44 38 55 46 40 35 35 31 28 106 57 46 38 33 50 41 35 30 32 27 24 97 52 41 34 29 46 37 31 26 29 24 21 88 48 37 30 25 43 33 27 23 26 22 19 79 45 34 27 22 40 30 24 20 24 20 17 710 42 31 24 20 37 28 22 18 22 18 15 6

= Room Cavity Ratio = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance = Wall Reflectance

Luminaire PLK-1T8-WCB-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Gloss White Cross Baffle and Opal Overlay

Ballast REL-1P32-SCBallast Factor 0.92Lamp F32T8Lumens per Lamp 2900Watts 34Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90


Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 76ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive

UseComparative Yearly Lighting Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens


0 3344 3344 3344 3344 334430 2587 2642 2831 3089 326540 2205 2297 2542 2894 315545 1974 2074 2373 2771 306950 1697 1843 2190 2628 295755 1493 1554 1964 2434 274160 1408 1455 1713 2135 227665 1332 1360 1555 1638 155570 1269 1269 1441 1338 116675 1224 1269 1315 1179 113380 1216 1216 1216 1013 94685 1212 1077 808 673 673

Test Date 9/16/2005

1T8 Lamp9 ⁄ "

2"

9 ⁄ " 9 ⁄ "

2" 2"

2T8 Lamps 3T8 Lamps

1T5, T5HO Lamp9 ⁄ "

2"

9 ⁄ " 9 ⁄ "

2" 2"

2T5, T5HO Lamps 3T5, T5HO Lamps

0-30 113 3.9 4.20-40 183 6.3 6.80-60 309 10.6 11.50-90 363 12.5 13.5

90-120 812 28.0 30.290-130 1204 41.5 44.890-150 1883 64.9 70.190-180 2324 80.1 86.50-180 2687 92.7 100.0

1 83 79 76 73 73 70 67 64 51 49 48 112 76 69 64 60 66 61 57 53 45 42 40 93 69 61 55 50 60 54 48 44 40 36 33 84 63 54 47 42 55 47 42 37 35 31 28 75 58 48 41 36 50 42 36 32 31 27 24 66 53 43 36 31 46 37 32 27 28 24 21 57 49 38 31 26 43 34 28 24 25 21 18 58 45 34 28 23 39 30 25 21 23 19 16 49 42 31 25 20 36 28 22 18 21 17 14 410 39 28 22 18 34 25 20 16 19 15 12 3


Luminaire PLK-1T8-RPF-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Gloss White Regress Basket and Opal Overlay






0 1713 1713 1713 1713 171330 1666 1653 1653 1639 162640 1593 1547 1547 1531 151645 1526 1493 1477 1460 144350 1460 1424 1405 1387 135155 1350 1329 1309 1268 124860 1220 1197 1197 1126 107965 1083 1055 1055 916 83370 892 892 823 652 58375 680 725 589 499 49980 608 608 540 473 47385 538 538 538 538 538

Test Date 9/9/2005




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 502 8.7 8.90-40 790 13.6 14.10-60 1266 21.8 22.60-90 1506 26.0 26.8

90-120 1211 20.9 21.690-130 1907 32.9 34.090-150 3221 55.5 57.490-180 4108 70.8 73.20-180 5613 96.8 100.0

1 90 86 82 79 80 77 74 71 60 58 56 222 82 75 70 65 73 67 63 59 53 49 47 193 75 66 59 54 67 59 54 49 47 43 39 164 68 59 51 46 61 53 46 42 41 37 34 145 63 52 45 39 56 47 41 36 37 33 29 126 58 47 39 34 51 42 36 31 33 29 25 117 53 42 35 30 48 38 32 27 30 26 22 108 49 38 31 26 44 34 28 24 27 23 20 99 46 35 28 23 41 31 25 21 25 21 17 810 43 32 25 20 38 29 23 19 23 19 16 7


Luminaire PLK-2T8-WCB-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 2-Lamp with Gloss White Center Louver and Side Reflectors






0 8095 8095 8095 8095 809530 6259 6435 6882 7451 776240 5314 5544 6126 6876 736645 4745 5011 5691 6504 705150 4107 4435 5183 6059 666255 3579 3784 4643 5543 609560 3402 3473 4059 4974 546765 3220 3276 3692 4331 460870 3053 3121 3499 3636 356775 2992 3128 3309 3309 326480 3040 3175 3243 3243 324385 3365 3365 3365 3231 3231

Test Date 9/18/2007

0-30 460 7.9 8.60-40 724 12.5 13.60-60 1161 20.0 21.80-90 1370 23.6 25.7

90-120 1167 20.1 21.990-130 1839 31.7 34.590-150 3106 53.6 58.290-180 3965 68.4 74.30-180 5335 92.0 100.0

1 85 81 78 75 76 73 70 67 56 55 53 202 78 71 66 62 69 64 59 56 50 47 44 173 71 63 56 51 63 56 51 47 44 40 37 154 65 56 49 43 58 50 44 40 39 35 32 135 60 49 42 37 53 44 38 34 35 31 27 116 55 44 37 32 49 40 34 29 31 27 24 107 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 26 28 24 21 98 47 36 29 25 42 33 27 23 26 22 18 89 43 33 26 22 39 30 24 20 24 19 16 710 40 30 24 19 36 27 22 18 22 18 15 7


Luminaire PLK-2T8-PERF-WCB-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 2-Lamp with Gloss White Center Louver and Side Reflectors

Ballast ICN-2M32-MCBallast Factor 0.88Lamp F32T8Lumens per Lamp 2900Watts 62Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90





0 7438 7438 7438 7438 743830 5784 5933 6245 6692 712640 4977 5161 5590 6172 678445 4496 4695 5193 5824 650450 3924 4143 4745 5439 616955 3293 3518 4213 4950 566660 3027 3074 3660 4388 506865 2859 2887 3220 3803 430370 2744 2744 3053 3190 315675 2674 2720 2856 2810 253880 2702 2702 2702 2567 243285 3096 2692 2423 2288 2154

Test Date 3/24/2005




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 333 5.7 6.10-40 538 9.3 9.90-60 898 15.5 16.50-90 1050 18.1 19.3

90-120 1267 21.8 23.490-130 2013 34.7 37.190-150 3420 59.0 63.090-180 4376 75.5 80.70-180 5426 93.6 100.0

1 85 81 78 75 75 72 69 67 54 53 51 162 78 71 66 61 68 63 59 55 48 45 42 133 71 63 56 51 62 56 50 46 42 39 36 114 65 55 48 43 57 49 43 39 37 33 30 105 59 49 42 37 52 44 38 33 33 29 26 96 54 44 37 32 48 39 33 29 30 26 23 87 50 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 27 23 20 78 46 36 29 24 41 32 26 22 24 20 17 69 43 32 26 21 38 29 23 19 22 18 15 510 40 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 20 16 14 5


Luminaire PLK-2T8-RPF-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 2-Lamp with Gloss White Regress Basket and Opal Overlay






0 5033 5033 5033 5033 503330 4863 4850 4850 4796 475540 4625 4594 4548 4457 438045 4463 4430 4330 4198 409850 4234 4198 4052 3869 374255 3968 3907 3702 3436 329360 3590 3543 3285 2933 276965 3137 3054 2776 2387 222170 2538 2470 2230 1818 168175 1994 1994 1677 1496 145180 1621 1554 1621 1486 141985 1615 1615 1615 1481 1346

Test Date 9/18/2007

0-30 752 8.6 9.40-40 1173 13.5 14.60-60 1871 21.5 23.30-90 2224 25.6 27.7

90-120 1518 17.4 18.990-130 2517 28.9 31.490-150 4463 51.3 55.790-180 5794 66.6 72.30-180 8018 92.2 100.0

1 86 82 79 76 77 73 71 68 57 56 54 222 78 72 66 62 70 64 60 56 51 48 45 193 71 63 57 52 64 57 51 47 45 41 38 164 65 56 49 44 58 50 45 40 40 36 32 145 60 50 43 38 53 45 39 34 36 31 28 126 55 45 38 32 49 40 34 30 32 28 24 117 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 26 29 25 21 108 47 36 30 25 42 33 27 23 26 22 19 99 44 33 27 22 39 30 24 20 24 20 17 810 41 30 24 20 37 27 22 18 22 18 15 7


Luminaire PLK-3T8-WCB-EPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 3-Lamp with Gloss White Center Louver and Side Reflectors



Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 80ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Normal



0 12424 12424 12424 12424 1242430 9523 9632 10079 10770 1123040 8071 8239 8852 9801 1053745 7201 7433 8179 9291 1018750 6187 6516 7447 8797 981955 5420 5584 6668 8243 936860 5092 5162 5889 7579 879965 4802 4830 5385 6829 796770 4494 4528 5077 5934 686075 4306 4442 4669 5031 539480 4256 4256 4256 4459 466285 4308 3904 3500 3500 3500

Test Date 8/11/2005




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 282 6.3 6.60-40 446 10.0 10.40-60 716 16.1 16.70-90 847 19.0 19.8

90-120 1225 27.5 28.690-130 1793 40.3 41.990-150 2785 62.6 65.090-180 3434 77.2 80.20-180 4281 96.2 100.0

1 88 84 80 77 77 74 71 69 56 54 53 162 80 73 68 63 70 65 60 57 49 46 44 143 73 64 58 53 64 57 52 47 44 40 37 124 67 57 50 44 59 51 45 40 39 35 31 105 61 51 43 38 54 45 39 34 35 30 27 96 56 45 38 33 49 40 34 30 31 27 23 87 52 41 33 28 46 36 30 26 28 24 20 78 48 37 30 25 42 33 27 23 25 21 18 79 44 33 27 22 39 30 24 20 23 19 16 610 41 30 24 20 37 27 22 18 21 17 14 5


Luminaire PLK-1T5HO-WCB-EPPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Gloss White Center Louver and Opal Overlay

Ballast ICN2S5490CBallast Factor 1.02Lamp F54T5HOLumens per Lamp 4450Watts 62Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90





0 4540 4540 4540 4540 454030 3509 3603 3888 4240 443040 2971 3124 3492 3967 424245 2671 2837 3252 3750 404850 2318 2519 2975 3504 377855 2045 2168 2679 3129 333460 1924 1994 2370 2651 274565 1832 1888 2165 2249 222170 1749 1818 2024 1989 188775 1677 1813 1904 1904 181380 1757 1757 1824 1757 175785 1750 1615 1615 1481 1481

Test Date 8/15/2005

0-30 150 3.4 3.50-40 242 5.4 5.60-60 408 9.2 9.50-90 484 10.9 11.3

90-120 1314 29.5 30.790-130 1945 43.7 45.490-150 3061 68.8 71.490-180 3804 85.5 88.70-180 4287 96.3 100.0

1 86 82 79 75 75 72 69 66 52 50 49 92 78 72 66 62 68 63 58 54 46 43 40 83 71 63 56 51 62 55 50 45 40 37 34 74 65 56 48 43 56 49 43 38 36 32 29 65 60 49 42 37 52 43 37 33 32 28 25 56 55 44 37 31 47 39 32 28 28 24 21 47 50 39 32 27 44 35 28 24 25 21 18 48 46 35 28 24 40 31 25 21 23 19 16 49 43 32 25 21 37 28 22 19 21 17 14 310 40 29 23 18 35 26 20 16 19 15 13 3


Luminaire PLK-1T5HO-RPF-EPPlank Architectural Beam9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Regress Perforated Basket and Opal Overlay

Ballast ICN-2S54Ballast Factor 1.02Lamp F54T5HOLumens per Lamp 4450Watts 63Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90





0 2276 2276 2276 2276 227630 2208 2181 2167 2154 214040 2098 2067 2037 2022 197645 2024 1991 1958 1908 187550 1916 1898 1843 1807 177055 1800 1759 1718 1677 161660 1642 1619 1596 1478 140865 1444 1416 1416 1249 113870 1166 1166 1166 960 85875 952 997 907 771 72580 878 878 811 743 67685 942 808 808 673 673

Test Date 9/13/2005




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 608 6.8 7.30-40 952 10.7 11.40-60 1514 17.0 18.10-90 1798 20.2 21.5

90-120 2078 23.4 24.890-130 3203 36.0 38.390-150 5222 58.7 62.490-180 6569 73.8 78.50-180 8366 94.0 100.0

1 86 82 79 76 76 73 70 68 56 54 52 172 78 72 67 62 69 64 60 56 49 46 43 153 72 63 57 52 63 56 51 47 43 40 37 134 66 56 49 44 58 50 44 39 38 34 31 115 60 50 43 37 53 44 38 34 34 30 27 106 55 45 37 32 49 40 34 29 31 27 23 97 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 25 28 24 20 88 47 36 29 25 42 32 27 22 25 21 18 79 44 33 26 22 39 30 24 20 23 19 16 610 41 30 24 19 36 27 21 18 21 17 14 6



Ballast ICN2S5490CBallast Factor 1.00Lamp F54T5HOLumens per Lamp 4450Watts 121Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90





0 9890 9890 9890 9890 989030 7573 7749 8263 8900 927940 6417 6647 7275 8071 859245 5724 6023 6686 7549 817950 4964 5275 6078 7063 772055 4377 4541 5400 6484 722060 4153 4200 4834 5913 661765 3942 3970 4469 5274 574670 3739 3773 4288 4494 459675 3626 3717 3944 4034 412580 3716 3581 3783 3716 378385 3904 3231 3096 2692 2827

Test Date 8/17/2005

0-30 968 7.3 8.00-40 1510 11.3 12.50-60 2405 18.0 19.80-90 2861 21.4 23.6

90-120 2725 20.4 22.590-130 4341 32.5 35.890-150 7284 54.8 60.190-180 9259 69.4 76.40-180 12120 90.8 100.0

1 84 80 77 74 74 71 68 66 55 53 51 182 76 70 65 60 68 62 58 54 48 45 43 163 70 62 55 50 62 55 50 45 43 39 36 134 64 54 48 43 56 49 43 39 38 34 31 125 58 48 41 36 52 43 37 33 34 30 26 106 54 43 36 31 48 39 33 29 30 26 23 97 50 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 27 23 20 88 46 35 29 24 41 32 26 22 25 21 18 79 43 32 26 21 38 29 23 19 23 19 16 710 40 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 21 17 14 6



Ballast ICN-4S5490C-2LSBallast Factor 1.00Lamp F54T5HOLumens per Lamp 4450Watts 183Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90


Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 66ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance NoncompliantComparative Yearly Lighting Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens


0 16049 16049 16049 16049 1604930 12260 12409 13005 13736 1440040 10368 10583 11425 12558 1355445 9225 9540 10585 11879 1307450 7958 8396 9673 11225 1255755 6995 7220 8693 10431 1186360 6617 6711 7743 9479 1086465 6274 6302 7162 8467 971670 5900 5900 6757 7306 819875 5757 5893 6255 6391 684580 5810 5743 5945 5608 587885 5923 5115 4846 4577 4308

Test Date 9/6/2005




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 468 7.9 12.00-40 726 12.3 18.60-60 1142 19.4 29.30-90 1328 22.5 34.0

90-120 671 11.4 17.290-130 1100 18.6 28.290-150 1953 33.1 50.090-180 2574 43.6 66.00-180 3902 66.1 100.0

1 63 60 57 55 56 54 52 50 43 42 41 202 57 53 49 46 51 48 44 42 38 36 34 173 52 46 42 38 47 42 38 35 34 31 29 144 48 41 36 32 43 37 33 30 30 27 25 135 44 37 32 28 40 33 29 26 27 24 22 116 41 33 28 24 37 30 26 22 25 21 19 107 37 30 25 21 34 27 23 20 22 19 17 98 35 27 22 19 31 25 20 17 20 17 15 89 32 25 20 17 29 23 18 15 19 15 13 710 30 23 18 15 27 21 17 14 17 14 12 7


Luminaire PLK-3T8-WCB-EU-MW-4-CLCPlank Architectural Beam9.75 X 48 3-Lamp with White Center Baffle and Center Lamp Cover

Ballast ICN-2P32-SC ICN-1P32-SCBallast Factor 0.88Lamp F32T8Lumens per Lamp 2950Watts 90Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90





0 7872 7872 7872 7872 787230 5852 5933 6204 6624 699040 4885 4993 5391 5973 653945 4297 4446 4944 5641 632150 3614 3833 4435 5293 602355 3048 3150 3907 4868 564560 2863 2909 3308 4364 516265 2665 2693 2943 3831 455370 2504 2470 2676 3121 373975 2357 2357 2357 2493 267480 2297 2094 1959 1892 189285 2288 1615 1077 673 538

Test Date 6/24/2008

0-30 548 9.3 10.90-40 892 15.1 17.70-60 1430 24.2 28.40-90 1522 25.8 30.2

90-120 1072 18.2 21.390-130 1679 28.5 33.390-150 2792 47.3 55.490-180 3520 59.7 69.80-180 5041 85.4 100.0

1 80 77 74 71 72 69 67 65 55 53 52 232 74 68 63 59 66 61 57 54 49 46 44 203 67 60 54 50 60 54 49 45 43 40 37 184 62 53 47 42 55 48 43 39 39 35 32 155 57 48 41 36 51 43 38 33 35 31 28 146 52 43 36 31 47 39 33 29 31 27 24 127 48 38 32 28 43 35 29 25 28 24 21 118 45 35 29 24 40 32 26 22 26 22 19 109 42 32 26 21 37 29 24 20 24 20 17 910 39 29 23 19 35 26 21 18 22 18 15 8


Luminaire PLK-232-LD-EP-4Plank Architectural Beam9.75 X 48 2-Lamp with 1 x 44 Cell Semi Specular Louver

Ballast ICN-2P32-NBallast Factor 0.88Lamp F32T8Lumens per Lamp 2950Watts 59Shielding Angle 0º = 40 90º = 23





0 8177 8177 8177 8177 817730 7247 7654 8033 8426 867040 6570 7183 7627 8209 865345 5691 6471 7267 8209 865350 4143 5074 6461 7428 826855 2414 3129 4827 6157 695460 1244 1572 2769 4364 511565 805 916 1416 2554 308170 583 617 892 1441 209275 544 589 725 907 131580 608 608 676 676 87885 808 538 673 373 808

Test Date 9/23/2008




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

0-30 232 7.9 9.00-40 401 13.6 15.50-60 671 22.7 26.00-90 713 24.2 27.6

90-120 680 23.1 26.390-130 994 33.7 38.590-150 1530 51.9 59.390-180 1868 63.3 72.40-180 2582 87.5 100.0

1 82 78 72 72 73 70 68 65 55 53 52 212 75 69 64 60 67 62 58 54 49 46 44 193 68 61 55 50 61 55 50 46 43 40 37 164 63 54 47 43 56 49 43 39 39 35 32 145 57 48 41 36 51 43 38 33 34 30 27 126 53 43 36 31 47 39 33 29 31 27 24 117 49 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 28 24 21 108 45 35 28 24 40 32 26 22 25 21 18 99 42 32 25 21 37 29 23 20 23 19 16 810 39 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 21 17 15 7



Ballast ICN-2P32-NBallast Factor 1.05Lamp F32T8Lumens per Lamp 2950Watts 36Shielding Angle 0º = 40 90º = 30





0 3355 3355 3355 3355 335530 2940 3102 3644 4308 461940 2680 3124 4089 4686 496245 2356 3020 3998 4364 466250 1734 2537 3431 3815 416155 1023 1575 2414 2925 321160 563 798 1267 1713 180765 361 444 666 1027 119470 274 309 446 823 126975 227 317 363 499 77180 270 270 338 405 47385 404 269 269 404 404

Test Date 9/24/2008

0-30 818 9.2 10.10-40 1309 14.7 16.20-60 2036 22.9 25.30-90 2153 24.2 26.7

90-120 1964 22.1 24.490-130 2976 33.4 36.990-150 4745 53.3 58.990-180 5907 66.4 73.30-180 8060 90.6 100.0

1 84 81 78 75 75 72 70 67 57 55 53 222 77 71 66 62 69 64 60 56 50 47 45 193 71 63 57 52 63 57 52 47 45 41 38 174 65 56 49 44 58 50 45 40 40 36 33 155 60 50 43 38 53 45 39 35 36 32 29 136 55 45 38 33 49 40 35 30 32 28 25 127 51 40 34 29 45 36 31 27 29 25 22 108 47 36 30 25 42 33 27 23 27 22 19 99 44 33 27 23 39 30 25 21 24 20 17 910 41 30 24 20 36 28 22 19 22 18 16 8



Ballast ICN-2S54Ballast Factor 1.00Lamp F54T5HOLumens per Lamp 4450Watts 122Shielding Angle 0º = 40 90º = 27





0 11708 11708 11708 11708 1170830 10201 11217 12531 12653 1274740 8867 10445 10491 10812 1137945 4566 9092 9440 11149 1264350 5475 6771 8469 11279 1264855 3170 4091 6484 7957 867260 1689 2088 3285 3989 398965 1083 1221 1804 2387 274870 858 960 1303 2195 301975 816 997 1179 1405 199480 1013 1149 1284 1284 148685 1481 1615 1750 1750 1750

Test Date 9/29/2008




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Multiple Control Input Ballasts

Digital electronic dimming ballasts maximize the

benefi ts of a lighting management system. EcoSystem

Ballasts offer 100% to 10% dimming; ideal for use

where saving energy, increasing fl exibility, and

maximizing productivity are the goals of the lighting

design.

Features

• Continuous, fl icker-free dimming from 100% to 10%

• Provides power for and responds to one occupancy

sensor, one photo sensor, and one personal control

input (infrared receiver or wallstation)

• Communicates status and sensor inputs over the

EcoSystem Bus

• Programmed rapid start design ensures full rated

lamp life while dimming and cycling

• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without fl ashing to

full brightness


dimming range

• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast does not

interfere with infrared devices

• End-of-lamp-life protection circuitry ensures safe

operation throughout entire lamp life


• Nonvolatile memory restores all ballast settings after

power failure

• Ballasts maintain consistent light output for linear

lamp lengths (i.e. 4 ft., 3 ft., 2 ft. have same relative

output)


EcoSystem case type G

EcoSystem case type J




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



Specifi cations

Standards



• CSA certifi ed (evaluated to the requirements of

C22.2 No. 74)

• NOM Listed for 32 W T8 Ballasts

• S Mark Certifi ed


• Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard

• Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements for

EMI/RFI emissions




practices that comply with the requirements of

ANSI/ESD S20.20

• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2000

Performance

• Operating Voltage: 120, 220/240, 277 V at 50 or

60 Hz

• Grounding: ballast and fi xture must be grounded for

proper dimming

• Dimming Range: 100% to 10% measured relative

light output



• Light Output Variation: Constant ±2% light output for


• Lamp Life: Average lamp life meets or exceeds

specifi ed lamp ratings

• Power Factor: 0.95 minimum

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20%

• Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient

• Maximum Inrush Current: 3 A per ballast at 277 V ,

7A per ballast at 120 V

• Class 2 Output: +20 V , 50mA maximum (one

daylight sensor, one keypad and one occupancy

sensor can be connected)

Environment






• Ballast is grounded by a mounting screw to the

fi xture

• Terminal blocks on the ballast accept the following

wire gauges:

Power Wiring, Lamp Wiring, and EcoSystem Bus:


Class 2 Sensors:


• Only one wire per terminal

• Class 2 sensor wiring must be separated from all

power and Class 1 wiring, consult all applicable

local and national codes


feature and one screw) within a fl uorescent fi xture

• Wiring from the ballast to lamp sockets shall not

exceed 7 ft. for T8, T5, and T5HO lamps

• Wiring from the ballast to lamps sockets shall not

exceed 3 ft. for T5 Twin Tube lamps

Lamp Seasoning

Refer to lamp manufacturer for lamp seasoning

requirements prior to dimming




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear and U bend T8 Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F32T8

(48 in.)

3 EC5 T832 G UNV 3L G 277

240

120

0.31

0.35

0.72

86.5

84.0

85.9

0.85

0.85

0.85

7650

7650

7650

88

89

89

0.98

1.01

0.99

0.94

0.97

0.95

EC5 T832 G UNV 317L G 277

240

120

0.41

0.47

0.95

105.7

106.5

106.8

1.17

1.17

1.17

10,530

10,530

10,530

100

99

99

1.11

1.10

1.10

1.06

1.05

1.05

2 EC5 T832 G UNV 2L G 277

240

120

0.22

0.25

0.49

59.6

57.6

58.8

0.85

0.85

0.85

5100

5100

5100

86

89

87

1.43

1.48

1.45

0.91

0.94

0.93

EC5 T832 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.21

0.25

0.49

57.4

59.0

59.1

0.85

0.85

0.85

5100

5100

5100

89

86

86

1.48

1.44

1.44

0.95

0.92

0.92

1 EC5 T832 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.13

0.26

31.6

31.0

31.3

0.85

0.85

0.85

2550

2550

2550

81

82

81

2.69

2.74

2.72

0.86

0.87

0.87

F25T8

(36 in.)

2 EC5 T825 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.18

0.20

0.41

48.9

49.0

49.0

0.85

0.85

0.85

3665

3665

3665

75

75

75

1.74

1.73

1.73

0.87

0.87

0.87

1 EC5 T825 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.10

0.11

0.23

27.6

27.0

26.9

0.85

0.85

0.85

1828

1828

1828

66

68

68

3.08

3.15

3.16

0.77

0.79

0.79

F17T8

(24 in.)

2 EC5 T817 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.13

0.15

0.31

36.2

37.0

37.0

0.85

0.85

0.85

2380

2380

2380

66

64

64

2.35

2.30

2.30

0.80

0.78

0.78

1 EC5 T817 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.08

0.09

0.17

20.6

20.0

20.1

0.85

0.85

0.85

1190

1190

1190

68

60

70

4.13

4.25

4.23

0.70

0.72

0.72




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 Lamps

Lamp No. of Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F35T5

(57.1 in.)

1 EC5 T535 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.15

0.18

0.35

42.0

42.3

42.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

3650

3650

3650

87

87

87

2.38

2.38

2.38

0.83

0.83

0.83

F28T5

(45.2 in.)

2 EC5 T528 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.23

0.27

0.54

64.5

65.0

65.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

5800

5800

5800

90

89

89

1.55

1.54

1.53

0.87

0.86

0.86

1 EC5 T528 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.14

0.27

32.6

32.9

32.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

2900

2900

2900

89

88

88

3.07

3.04

3.04

0.86

0.85

0.85

F21T5

(33.4 in.)

2 EC5 T521 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.17

0.20

0.39

46.0

47.2

47.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

4200

4200

4200

91

89

89

2.17

2.12

2.12

0.91

0.89

0.89

1 EC5 T521 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.09

0.11

0.22

25.8

25.8

25.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

2100

2100

2100

81

81

81

3.88

3.88

3.88

0.81

0.81

0.81

F14T5

(21.6 in.)

2 EC5 T514 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.12

0.14

0.28

32.8

33.3

33.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

2700

2700

2700

82

81

81

3.05

3.00

3.00

0.85

0.85

0.85

1 EC5 T514 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.07

0.08

0.16

19.0

19.2

19.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

1350

1350

1350

71

70

70

5.26

5.21

5.21

0.74

0.74

0.74




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 HO Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

F54T5

(45.2 in.)

2 EC5 T554 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.40

0.50

0.99

110.1

119.0

119.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

10,000

10,000

10,000

91

84

84

0.91

0.84

0.84

0.98

0.91

0.91

1 EC5 T554 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.21

0.24

0.48

56.5

58.0

57.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

5000

5000

5000

88

86

86

1.77

1.73

1.73

0.96

0.93

0.93

F39T5

(33.4 in.)

2 EC5 T539 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.30

0.35

0.70

83.0

84.0

84.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

7000

7000

7000

84

83

83

1.20

1.19

1.19

0.94

0.93

0.93

1 EC5 T539 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.16

0.18

0.37

43.3

44.0

44.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

3500

3500

3500

81

80

80

2.31

2.27

2.27

0.90

0.89

0.89

F24T5

(21.6 in.)

2 EC5 T524 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.45

54.8

54.0

53.9

1.0

1.0

1.0

4000

4000

4000

73

74

74

1.82

1.85

1.86

0.89

0.89

0.89

1 EC5 T524 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.11

0.12

0.24

30.0

28.8

28.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

2000

2000

2000

67

69

69

3.33

3.47

3.47

0.80

0.83

0.83




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballasts for T5 Twin Tube Lamps

Lamp No. ofLamps

Model CaseSize

InputVoltage(VAC)

InputCurrent

(A)

InputPower

(W)

BallastFactor(BF)

SystemLumens

(lm)



RelativeEffi cacy

(RSE)

FT55

(20.7 in.)

2 EC5 T555 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.40

0.46

0.92

110.8

110.4

110.4

0.9

0.9

0.9

8640

8640

8640

78

78

78

0.81

0.82

0.82

0.99

0.90

0.90

1 EC5 T555 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.46

55.4

55.2

55.2

0.9

0.9

0.9

4320

4320

4320

70

70

70

1.62

1.63

1.63

0.89

0.90

0.90

FT50

(22.5 in.)

2 EC5 T550 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.36

0.42

0.84

99.7

100.8

100.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

8000

8000

8000

80

79

79

1.00

0.99

0.99

1.00

0.99

0.99

1 EC5 T550 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.20

0.23

0.45

55.4

54.0

54.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

4000

4000

4000

72

72

74

1.81

1.85

1.85

0.90

0.93

0.93

FT40

(22.5 in.)

2 EC5 T540 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.27

0.32

0.64

74.8

76.8

76.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

6200

6200

6200

83

81

81

1.34

1.30

1.30

1.07

1.04

1.04

1 EC5 T540 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.16

0.18

0.36

44.3

43.2

43.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

3100

3100

3100

70

72

72

2.26

2.31

2.31

0.90

0.93

0.93

FT39

FT36

(15.5 in.)

2 EC5 T536 J UNV 2 J 277

240

120

0.26

0.31

0.61

72.0

73.2

73.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

5700

5700

5700

79

78

78

1.39

1.37

1.37

1.00

0.98

0.98

1 EC5 T536 J UNV 1 J 277

240

120

0.14

0.17

0.33

38.8

39.6

39.6

1.0

1.0

1.0

2850

2850

2850

74

72

72

2.57

2.53

2.53

0.93

0.91

0.91




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



G Case Dimensions

A = 9.5 in. (241 mm)

B = 8.9 in. (226 mm)

C = 7.1 in. (180 mm)

D = 1.0 in. (25 mm)

E = 2.38 in. (60 mm)

G Case

EcoSystem Ballast Case Dimensions

G case ballasts ship with 36 in. leads for lamp connections

and 18 in. leads for Hot, Neutral, E1 and E2 connections

J Case

J Case Dimensions

A = 18.0 in. (457 mm)

B = 17.68 in. (449 mm)

C = 6.82 in. (173 mm)

D = .394 in. (10 mm)

E = 1.0 in. (25 mm)

F = 1.18 in. (30 mm)

ABC D

E

A

B

C DE

F




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T8, T5, T5 HO

Wiring to One Lamp (J case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

Blue

Red

Wiring to Two Lamps (J case shown)

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

Blue

Red

Yellow


BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

N/CN/C

Blue

Red

Yellow


BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

B/WB/W

Blue

Red

Yellow

Striped

NOTICE






Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T5 Twin-Tube

Wiring to One Lamp

Wiring to Two Lamps

BLUBLU

REDRED

NOTICE



BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

Blue

Red

Yellow

Blue

Red




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: EcoSystem Bus

EcoSystem Bus Overview



system

• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital

ballasts, 32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors,

and 64 wallstations or IR receivers

• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity

insensitive and can be wired in any topology



• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by

using the EcoSystem Programmer



#18 AWG solid wire









practices

Notes



• E1 and E2 wires are not polarity sensitive



Wire Gauge Bus Length (max)#12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)

#14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)

#16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)

To the EcoSystem

Bus Supply & up

to 64 total ballasts

Ballast Terminals

Ballast Terminals

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Class 2 Sensors

Electrical Contractors and Engineers:

• Always follow applicable national and local electrical

code requirements when connecting circuits to

EcoSystem devices

• All fi eld installed Class 2 wiring must be separated

from line voltage wiring by at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)

• Some local electrical codes require Class 2 wiring to

be separately routed in a metal conduit

• Ballasts Class 2 Sensor terminals only accept

#22 AWG solid conductors

Lutron Requires:

• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate.





• Refer to Application note #142 for additional

information

Fixture Manufacturers:

• UL 1598 6.17.1 allows:

Factory installed power limited wiring and branch

circuit wiring that come in random contact within

the luminaire shall have insulation rated for the

maximum voltage that exists in any of the circuits.

(EcoSystem ballast circuits require minimum 600 V

insulated wire)

• UL 1598 6.17.2.1 requires:

Luminaires designed for the fi eld installation of

power limited circuits shall be provided with a

means of segregating or separating the fi eld-installed

power limited circuit wiring from the branch circuit

wiring within the luminaire (see UL 1598 6.17 for

details)

Lutron Requires:

• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate








Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Daylight Sensor

Wiring to a Daylight Sensor



Black

White

Yellow

+20 V

Common

IR

Daylight

Red

Black

White

Yellow



• Connect the four conductors to the four Digital

Ballast terminals as shown.

• Daylight sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m)

of the ballast.


solid wire.

Notes

• Consult the daylight sensor specifi cation sheet to

properly locate the sensor.

• Do not place the sensor above pendant fi xtures,

directly below lighting fi xtures, or within skylight

wells.

• When wiring both a wallstation and daylight sensor

to one ballast, only connect the IR wire (white) from

the keypad, cap off the white wire from the daylight

sensor.




+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

G Case Terminals

J Case Terminals

Daylight Sensor

#22 AWG solid only

#22 AWG solid only

Daylight Sensor




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Occupancy Sensor

Wiring to a Lutron Occupant Sensor (LOS-XX)



Black

Blue

+20 V

Common

Occ

Red

Black

Blue



• Connect the three conductors to the three ballast

terminals as shown

• Occupant sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m)

of the ballast


solid wire

Notes

• Occupant sensors from other manufacturers may be

used with EcoSystem ballasts if the sensor meets

the following criteria:

Vin = +20 V , current draw less than 35 mA

• If other manufacturer’s occupant sensors are used

terminal colors and sensor wire colors may not

match




+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals

#22 AWG solid only

Occupant

Sensor

#22 AWG solid only

G Case Terminals

Occupant

Sensor




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams (continued)

Wiring to an IR Receiver and Wallstation

• Wiring summary:

Sensor Wire Ballast Terminal Terminal Color

Red

Black

White

+20 V

Common

IR

Red

Black

White



• Connect the three conductors to the three Digital

Ballast terminals as shown

• Receiver must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) of the

ballast


solid wire

Notes

• Only one wallstation or IR receiver can be wired to a

digital ballast

• If a daylight sensor and wallstation/IR receiver are

connected to one ballast, do not connect the

daylight sensor’s IR output




+20V

DaylightOccIR

Common

Class 2 (#22 AW

G S

olid)

E2E1

Class 2

Bus

DHNEU

277 VoltSH

#22 AWG solid only

G Case Terminals

IR Receiver

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals

#22 AWG solid only

IR Receiver

Wallstation

Wires to Digital Ballast




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Multiple Devices

Multiple Sensors with One Ballast

• EcoSystem ballasts accept wiring for one daylight

sensor input, one occupant sensor input and one IR

input (wallstation or IR receiver)

• EcoSystem daylight sensors have IR outputs that

allow the device to operate as a programming port.

In applications where a daylight sensor and

wallstation are wired to the same ballast, do not

connect the white wire of the daylight sensor to

the ballast. The wallstation operates as the

programming port through its integral IR receiver

• Use the chart below as a guide for wiring multiple

devices to a ballast

How to Use the Chart

Connect a senor to a ballast from the “Devices” column (in bold). Along

the selected device row, are “Y’s” and “N’s”. Where a “Y” is placed, the

device at the top of that column can also be connected to the same

ballast. An “N” indicates no connection allowed.

Devices Daylight sensor

(with IR)

Occupant sensor

Wallstation or

IR receiver

Daylight Sensor (no IR)

Daylight sensor

(with IR)Y N N

Occupant

sensorY Y Y

Wallstation or

IR ReceiverN Y Y

Daylight sensor

(no IR)N Y Y

Example: When a Daylight Sensor with its internal IR are connected to a ballast, then only an occupancy sensor can be added for the system to properly function.

+20V

Day

light

IRCom

mon


Occ

J Case Terminals




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Line Voltage Dimmers

EcoSystem Ballasts and 3-wire dimmers

• Lutron 3-wire dimmers only control the ballast they

are wired to; EcoSystem does not support grouping

of 3-wire control input.




• Wire as shown

Line input Connects to

Hot Dimmer Black Wire


Dimmer wire Connects toYellow Ballast Orange (DH)



Green Earth Ground

• EcoSystem ballast line voltage and 3-wire input

terminals only accept one #18 AWG solid wire.


• EcoSystem ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer

should not be used for emergency/egress lighting

unless an external emergency ballast is used in the

fi xture. See Lutron Ap. Note #50.

• EcoSystem ballasts may be used for emergency/

egress lighting when controlled by a Lutron dimming

panel (GP); where the panel is a dedicated

emergency panel.

Notice

3-Wire control turns off digital ballasts when the

control is in the off position. The digital ballast

inputs: daylight sensor, wallstation, occupant sensor,

and IR receiver will not function when the digital

ballast is turned off

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

277 V~Class 2

Bus

LUTRONLUTRON

3-Wire Dimmer

Green

Ground

Red

Yellow

White

Neutral

Hot / Black

White

Ora

ng

e

Bla

ck




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:



Attention Electricians and Fixture Manufacturers



7 ft. (2 m) for linear lamps (T5, T5HO, T8). Lead

lengths must not exceed 3 ft. for T5 twin tube

lamps.

Lamp Sockets



Mounting for T5 and T5HO Lamps



Mounting for T8 & T5 Twin Tube Lamps



Having a lamp too close to the grounded metal will

reduce lamp life. Having a fl uorescent lamp too far

away from the grounded metal will make the lamp

fl icker or not turn on at all.

Lamp Seasoning


lamp seasoning prior to dimming

Further Information

For further information please visit

www.lutron.com/ecosystem or contact our 24-hour

Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466



Catalog Number:SL20-2/39BX-DRA-CB-XX"-FINISH-VOLTAGENotes:

Type:

P10-68755



Catalog Number:2200-DRS-4000-99M-062-DM-IN-SM1Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

INTENDED USE

The LuneraTM 2200 is an ultra thin architectural lay-in luminaire for office, school, hospital, and other commercial applications. It generates soft, voluminous light that is ideal for a range of applications. The uniform luminance across the light panel allows the fixture to be placed without it being a source of glare. It does all in an aesthetically pleasing fixture package.

Utlizing superior quality LEDs, Lunera achieves greater output and efficiency producing high color rendering and extended lifetime performance.

Lunera fixtures are manufactured in the US using clean manufacturing standards including ROHs compliancy.

FEATURES

THE LUNERA 2200 IS A DIRECT REPLACEMENT FOR 2’X 4’ TROFFERS IN COMMERCIAL SPACES.3,845 lumens62 watts.62 watts/ sq. ft. (typical)Smooth continuous dimming (0-10 volt)Color temp: 4000K, 5000K5 Year Warranty85+ CRIEasily remotable power supplyLM-80 tested LEDsLM-79 tested luminaire

CONSTRUCTION

Solid design, precision tooling and exacting quality control create a commercial LED fixture that meets the industry’s needs and requirements.

Anodized aluminum extrusion with acrylic layers, tested and proven LEDs and a solid state power supply.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Standard driver is high efficiency, solid-state with smooth dimming available.

Choose 120V 50/60Hz or 277V 50/60Hz.

PLATFORM

2200DIRECTIONAL

DRFRAME

SCCT VOLTAGE WATTAGE

062CONTROL PSU

2200 DR: DIRECT S: SILVER 4000: 4000K5000: 5000K

120V: 120 VOLTS277V: 277 VOLTS999M: MULTI VOLT

062: 62 WATTS SS: STANDARD SWITCH DM: 0-10V DIM

LUNERA 2200LED 2FT X 2FT GRID LAY-IN LUMINAIRE

��

��

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, LM-79 TESTING, AND IES FILES AVAILABLE ONLINE AT WWW.LUNERA.COM

IN: INTEGRATED RE: REMOTE (OPEN BAY)

HANGING HARDWARE

GARAGE MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT BATTERY BACKUP

ACCESSORIES

HS1: HANGNG HARDWARE (8 FT)NA: NONE

GM1: GARAGE MOUNT NA: NONE

SM1: SURFACE MOUNTNA: NONE

1BB: BATTERY BACKUPNA: NONE

MANUFACTURED IN THE U.S.

ORDERING




Type:

P10-68755

Lunera Lighting, Inc | For more info, contact us at [email protected] | www.lunera.com |

T 650-241-3875 | F 650-362-1987 | 3696 Haven Avenue, Suite A, Redwood City, CA 94063

© 2010 LuneraTM Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved

SPECIFICATIONS PHOTOMETRICS

62watts

POWER CONSUMPTION

3,845lumens

OUTPUT

62Lm/W

EFFICACY

DIMENSIONS & MOUNTING

LUNERA 2200 GRID LAY-IN FIXTURE

��

��

�� ! "��

#��$ %&�"

'(��)��*+, -.

��$�$�� /��0�

#��1��)#23, 435333�6��$

��+�� 7 8�9

'��:�� ;<3:�43*=3�6>��<22:�43*=3�6>�

��+��$�� -.?

�� @��5�3A;3:5��'�=38=�/��B�'

�0�$��

@��$��$�)6B?B@, <CD�B�<CD�B�;D�

?��0� ;C��E$

6��$�� /��F�>�F�/��

G��$ G��H��F��/��

1��$�$��F�F�$�>��F��F�);4*;=5�8*;=�0��,

G�� A;4I��;<<IJ�F��)A<=I��43I,

6��F�� <3KA&4K�L65��A��F��$��

��B��L��#��0$ ;4M��5�;33M�N��E��

��A��O��(��

�� P#! P#! '�#! �

1��P$�� Q��F��$�F5�L�6��

'�N�� @��F�@��

#'@��$$ #23�L��F��435333J�0�$�R��S;T3I�)<==I�,

SURFACE MEASUREMENTS

U�� #��$ K�#/1� 9 ��V�

3AT3I 8&% .-�� .-��

3AC3I �-%8 ��. ��.

3A=3I .8%% 28W& 28W&

3A83I %-"- ��

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY INTENSITY (CANDLEPOWER) SUMMARY

PID# 10-9.L3.DO1 REV A

8 X 8 8 X 10 10 X 10 10 X 12 12 X 12

FOOT CANDLES 53 46 37 31 24

LPD 1.03 0.78 0.62 0.52 0.43

1.063

23 13/16”

23 13/16” 1 3/16”

/�� 3I C4I

3I �."% �."%

4I �."� �.".

;4I �.%� �.%"

<4I ��&� ��&&

T4I ;3&2 ��8"

C4I 8%� 8%&

44I 2;= 2<3

=4I C23 C2T

24I .%� .%"

&4I �8 "�

83I � �




Type:

P10-68755

INTENDED USE

The 2250 is an LED fixture designed for indoor parking facilities. Using LED technology, it gener-ates uniform light that is ideal for the energy efficient parking garage. The uniformity across the light panel allows the fixture to be placed without it being a source of glare. It is a fully closed system that is maintenance free.

Utlizing superior quality LEDs and state of the art engineering design, Lunera achieves greater out-put efficiency and extended lifetime performance.

FEATURES

3,840 lumens62 watts.085 watts/ sq. ft. (typical)Controllable (0-10 volt)Damp Rated5000K color temperatureEasily remotable power supply5 Year Warranty85+ CRILM-80 tested LEDsLM-79 tested luminaire

CONSTRUCTION

Solid design, precision tooling and exacting quality control create a commercial LED fixture that exceeds industry requirements and delivers the full potential of LED technology.

Aluminum extrusion with acrylic layers, tested and proven LEDs and a solid state power supply.

FINISH

Anodized aluminum encasing with various custom finishes available.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Standard driver is high efficiency, solid-state with smooth dimming available.

Choose 120V 50/60Hz or 277V 50/60Hz.

LUNERA 2200LED

2FT X 2FT PARKING GARAGE FIXTURE

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, LM-79 TESTING, AND IES FILES AVAILABLE ONLINE AT WWW.LUNERA.COM

DIMENSIONS & MOUNTING

23.3”

23.3” 4.0”

62watts

POWER CONSUMPTION

3,845lumens

OUTPUT

Lunera Lighting, Inc | For more info, contact us at [email protected] | www.lunera.com |

T 650-241-3875 | F 650-362-1987 | 3696 Haven Avenue, Suite A, Redwood City, CA 94063

© 2010 LuneraTM Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved PID# 10-9.L3.DO1 REV A



Catalog Number:SDPS6LED4-35K-8-277V-LUTRON 3D HILUME DIMMINGNotes:

Type:

P10-68755

DATE: TYPE:

FIRM NAME:

PROJECT:

A Division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc.

In a continuing effort to offer the best product possible we reserve the right to change, without notice, specifications or materials that in our opinion will not alter the function of the product.Web: www.prescolite.com Tech Support: (888) 777-4832

Pendalum™

SDPS6LED4 6" Surface MountLED Pendant High Output120V, 277V

For conversion to millimeters, multiply inches by 25.4

Not to Scale

ALUM-PLM-014

APPLICATIONS: Prescolite’s Pendalum series of luminaires provides specifiers with a superior alternative to traditional low bay fixtures and cylinders. The Pendalum™ collection is ideal for a wide variety of applications including retail stores, commercial offices, schools, grocery stores, restaurants, and airport terminals.

FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION:Decorative diecast aluminum heat sink with decorative 52º hang-straight canopy/driver compartment and 177/8" x 1/2" I.P. stem. Painted surfaces feature durable powder coat finish in Zet (metallic silver), White, or Black.

REFLECTOR: High purity spun aluminum reflector with iridescence suppressed Alzak anodized finish in a variety of colors.

LED LIGHT ENGINE:High output LED light engine equipped with (10) high brightness white LEDs (2700K, 3500K, 4000K, or 5000K) on a metal clad circuit board. Secured to an integral die cast aluminum heat sink for excellent thermal management. System designed for optimal life and lumen maintenance (50,000 hours at 70% average lumen maintenance*). *LED life calculations are based upon maintaining application LED junction

temperatures and drive currents at or below manufacturer's requirements per IESNA-LM-80-08 test data.

Optics: Vacuum metalized injection molded optical reflector features (10) parabolic LED modules with Prescolite’s patent pending American Matte™ finish to produce uniform illumination. Also available in spot, medium, or wide distribution to best fit higher ceiling applications.

Reflector/light engine assembly attaches with a single tamper resistant screw (tool provided) for added security and ensures ceiling appearance free of sagging throughout life of the product.

LED DRIVER:

Energy efficient solid state constant current electronic driver with 50,000 hour minimum anticipated life. Meets UL Class 2, inherent short-circuit protection, self limited, overload protected.

INSTALLATION:Luminaire mounts to standard J-box.

LABELS:CSA C/US listed. Suitable for damp location under covered ceiling.

CATALOG NUMBER: EXAMPLE: SDPS6LED435K7DM Z

3 1 16

17 7 8

8 7 8

29 3 4

5.750

31/16"

177/8"

87/8"

53/4"

293/4"

FIXTURES LED COLOR TEMP. CRI BEAM ANGLE VOLTAGE REFLECTOR FINISH REFLECTOR COLOR FIXTURE FINISH ❑ SDPS6LED4

(1) 6" Pendant Mount Surface High Output LED Luminaire

❑ Z Zet (metallic silver)

❑ BL Black

❑ WHWhite

❑ 27K2700 Kelvin

❑ 35K3500 Kelvin

❑ 40K4000 Kelvin

❑ 50K5000 Kelvin

❑ Blank120V

❑ 277V120/277V

❑ BlankSpecular

❑ SSSemi-Specular

❑ BlankClear Alzak

❑ CGChampagne Gold Alzak

❑ BLBlack Alzak

❑ WEWheat Alzak

❑ LWLight Wheat Alzak

❑ PWPewter Alzak



❑ BlankVacuum metalized reflector with 45º cutoff

❑ SP18Lensed optic with 18º spot distribution

❑ MD25Lensed optic with 25º medium distribution

❑ FL35Lensed optic with 35º wide distribution

❑ SDPS6LED4(1) 6" Pendant Mount SurfaceHigh Output LED Luminaire

❑ 35K3500 Kelvin ❑ 8

Nominal 80+ CRI

❑ 277V120/277V

LUTRON 3D HI-LUME DIMMING




Type:

P10-68755

PHOTOMETRIC DATA


Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. ALUM-PLM-014


45°55° 432165°75° 25285° 0

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-30 644 67.20-40 806 84.10-60

100.00 0.0

0-180 100.0

SDPS6LED435K8 BLLED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI

Fixture Efficacy: 34.3Spacing Criteria: 0.8


DEG CANDELA LUMENS05 1047

15 860 24225 706 30435 251 16245 14255 38 3665 6 775 1 185 0 0

0



% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 113 110 108 105 111 108 106 104 104 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 2 107 102 98 94 105 100 96 93 97 94 91 94 91 89 91 89 87 3 101 95 89 85 99 93 88 85 91 87 83 88 85 82 86 83 81 4 96 88 82 78 94 87 81 77 85 80 76 83 79 75 81 77 74 5 91 82 76 71 89 81 75 71 79 74 70 77 73 70 76 72 69 6 86 77 70 66 84 76 70 66 74 69 65 73 68 65 71 67 64 7 81 72 65 61 80 71 65 61 70 64 60 68 64 60 67 63 60 8 77 67 61 57 76 67 61 57 66 60 56 65 60 56 64 59 56 9 73 63 57 53 72 63 57 53 62 57 53 61 56 53 60 56 52 10 70 60 54 50 69 59 54 50 59 53 50 58 53 49 57 53 49

Room

Cav

ityRa

tioCOEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method

SDPS6LED435K8 BL

1200

800

400

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º

LUMEN MULTIPLIER 2700K 3500K 4000K 5000K 70+ CRI 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.41

Note: Multipliers shown are based on LED manufacturer data and can be used to approximate the lumen intensity of a fixture with different LED color temperature and/or CRI with identical optical configuration and reflector finish. For reference only.

DRIVER DATA SDPS6LED4 SDPS6LED4 277VInput Voltage 120V +/- 10% 120/277V +/- 10%Input Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 HzInput Current 0.235A (0.4A max) 0.23A/0.13AInput Power 28W (34W max) 27.5/28.5 WConstant Current Output 1400mA 1400mA

THD <20% <20%EMI Filtering FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class BOperating Temperature -40ºC to 60ºC -40ºC to 60ºCOver-voltage, over-current, short-circuit protected

2100

1400

700

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º


45° 415055°65° 108075° 50485° 0

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-30 878 85.70-400-60 1015

1023 100.00 0.0

0-180 1023 100.0

SDPS6LED435K8FL35 BLLED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Flood Lens

Fixture delivered lumens: 1023 Fixture Efficacy: 36.6Spacing Criteria: 0.6


DEG CANDELA LUMENS0 21005

15 1525 41625 572 26735 15245 45 3455 14 565 7 675 2 285 0 1

0



% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 114 112 109 107 112 110 108 106 106 104 102 102 101 99 98 97 97 2 109 105 102 99 107 103 100 97 100 98 95 97 95 93 95 93 91 3 105 99 95 91 103 98 94 91 95 92 89 93 90 88 91 89 87 4 101 94 89 86 99 93 89 85 91 87 84 89 86 83 87 84 82 5 97 89 84 81 95 88 84 80 87 83 80 85 82 79 84 81 78 6 93 85 80 76 91 84 80 76 83 79 76 82 78 75 80 77 75 7 89 81 76 72 88 81 76 72 79 75 72 78 74 72 77 74 71 8 86 78 73 69 85 77 72 69 76 72 69 75 71 68 74 71 68 9 83 74 69 66 82 74 69 66 73 69 66 72 68 65 71 68 65 10 80 71 66 63 79 71 66 63 70 66 63 69 65 63 69 65 63

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


SDPS6LED435K8FL35 BL

Alum - SDPS6LED4 - 6" Surface Mount LED Pendant

NOTES: Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).




Type:

P10-68755

PHOTOMETRIC DATA


Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A. ALUM-PLM-014


45° 378155°65° 123575° 25285° 748

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-300-40 10380-60 1085

100.00 0.0

0-180 100.0

SDPS6LED435K8MD25 BLLED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Medium Lens

Spacing Criteria: 0.4


DEG CANDELA LUMENS0 40205 3614

15 1566 43525 442 20835 114 7545 41 3155 17 1665 8 775 1 385 1 1

0

4050

2700

1350

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º



% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 114 112 110 108 112 110 108 106 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 2 110 106 103 100 108 104 101 99 101 99 97 98 96 95 96 94 93 3 106 101 97 93 104 99 96 93 97 94 91 95 92 90 92 90 88 4 102 96 92 88 100 95 91 88 93 89 87 91 88 86 89 87 85 5 98 92 87 84 97 91 87 83 89 85 83 88 84 82 86 83 81 6 95 88 83 80 94 87 83 80 86 82 79 85 81 79 83 80 78 7 92 85 80 77 91 84 80 76 83 79 76 82 78 76 81 78 75 8 89 81 77 74 88 81 77 73 80 76 73 79 76 73 78 75 73 9 86 79 74 71 85 78 74 71 77 73 71 77 73 70 76 73 70 10 84 76 72 69 83 76 71 68 75 71 68 74 71 68 74 70 68

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


SDPS6LED435K8MD25 BL


45°55° 113765° 46375° 25285° 748

ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARYZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE0-30 11000-40 11470-60 1178

1182 100.00 0.0

0-180 1182 100.0

SDPS6LED435K8SP18 BLLED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Spot Lens

Fixture delivered lumens: 1182 Fixture Efficacy: 42.36Spacing Criteria: 0.2


DEG CANDELA LUMENS05 6325 518

15 1377 40625 367 17735 71 4645 32 2355 1065 3 375 1 185 1 0

0



% Wall Reflectance

70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 115 113 111 109 113 111 109 108 107 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 2 111 108 105 102 109 106 103 101 103 101 99 100 98 97 98 96 95 3 108 103 100 97 106 102 99 96 100 97 95 97 95 93 95 93 92 4 105 99 96 93 103 98 95 92 96 93 91 95 92 90 93 91 89 5 102 96 92 89 100 95 91 89 93 90 88 92 89 87 91 88 86 6 99 93 89 86 98 92 88 86 91 88 85 90 87 85 88 86 84 7 96 90 86 83 95 89 86 83 88 85 83 87 84 82 86 84 82 8 94 87 83 81 93 87 83 81 86 83 80 85 82 80 84 82 80 9 92 85 81 79 91 85 81 78 84 81 78 83 80 78 83 80 78 10 89 83 79 77 89 83 79 77 82 79 76 81 78 76 81 78 76

Room

Cav

ityRa

tio


SDPS6LED435K8SP18 BL

10500

7000

3500

90º

75º

60º

45º

30º15º

Alum - SDPS6LED4 - 6" Surface Mount LED Pendant

NOTES: Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:

Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts Hi-lume® 3D Architectural Dimming

Hi-lume 3D 1 06.11.09

Hi-lume 3D Overview

Hi-lume 3D architectural electronic dimming ballasts

are designed to meet the most demanding lighting

requirements. By providing industry leading

performance with a full-range of 100% to less than 1%

fluorescent dimming, Hi-lume 3D ballasts enable you to

provide the ideal visual environment for any application.

Features

• Continuous, flicker-free dimming from 100% to

1% for T5 and 0.7% for T8

• Supports standard 3-wire line-voltage phase-control

technology for consistent fixture-to-fixture

dimming performance

• Compatible with EcoSystem® Bus control, GRAFIK

Eye® QS, and Quantum®, allowing for integration into

an existing/planned EcoSystem• Models available for T5 and T8 lamps

• Programmed rapid start design preheats lamp

cathodes before applying full arc voltage to ensure

full-rated lamp life while dimming and cycling

• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without

flashing to full brightness


dimming range maintains power quality

• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast

does not interfere with infrared devices operating

between 38 and 42 kHz

• Inrush current limiting circuitry eliminates circuit

breaker tripping, switch arcing, and relay failure

• For linear lamps, ballasts maintain consistent

light output for different lamp lengths, ensuring

fixture uniformity


• Protected from miswires of any input power to

control lead, or from lamp leads to each other

and/or ground

• 100% compatible with all Lutron 3-wire fluorescent

controls and EcoSystem digital controls


• 5-year limited warranty with Lutron field service

commissioning (3-year standard warranty)

from date of purchase

Hi-lume 3D, case type C

1.18 in. W (30 mm) x 1.00 in. H (25 mm) x

18.00 in. L (457 mm)

Hi-lume 3D, case type G

2.38 in. W (60 mm) x 1.00 in. H (25 mm) x

9.5 in. L (241 mm)




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 2 06.11.09

Specifications

Performance

• Dimming Range: 100% to < 0.7% measured relative

light output (RLO) for T8 and 100% to 1% measured

relative light output for T5.


• Relative Humidity: maximum 90% noncondensing


• Lamp Flicker: none visible

• Light Output Variation: constant ±2% light output for


• Lamp Life: average lamp life meets or exceeds

rating of lamp manufacturer

• Power Factor: greater than .95

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): less than 10%

• Maximum Inrush Current: 7 amps per ballast at

120 V, 3 amps per ballast at 277 V

• Operating Voltage: Universal input 120/277 V

• Ballast Factor - 1.0/1.17 for T8 lamps and 1.0 for

T5 lamps

Dimming Range for T5 lamps:

BF Dimming Range (Max/Min (BF)

Dimming Ratio

1.0 1.00 / 0.01 100:1

Dimming Range for T8 lamps:

BF Dimming Range (Max/Min (BF)

Dimming Ratio

1.17 1.17 / 0.0085 138:1

1.0 1.00 / 0.0085 118:1

Environment





Standards



• CSA certified (evaluated to the requirements of

C22.2 No. 74)


• Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast

Standard

• Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements

for EMI/RFI emissions




practices that comply with the requirements

of ANSI/ESD S20.20

• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO

9001.2000


• Ballast is grounded via a mounting screw to the

fixture


feature and one screw) within a fluorescent fixture.

• Power and lamp wiring terminals accept only one

18 AWG solid wire per terminal

Lamp Seasoning

Refer to your lamp company for lamp seasoning

requirements prior to dimming.




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 3 06.11.09

Hi-lume 3D Ballasts for Linear and U-Bent T8 Lamps

Lamp Type

Lamp Watts (length)

Lamps per Ballast

Case Size

Hi-lume 3D Input Voltage (VAC)

Ballast Current (A)

Ballast Factor (BF)

Input Power (W)

System Lumens* (lm)

System Efficacy* (lm/W)

Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF)

Relative System Efficacy (RSE)

T8 and U-Bent

32 W

(48 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T832 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.13

0.15

0.30

1.00

1.00

1.00

34.8

35.0

35.1

3000

3000

3000

86

86

85

2.87

2.85

2.85

0.92

0.91

0.91

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T832 C UNV 1 17 277

240

120

0.15

0.17

0.34

1.17

1.17

1.17

39.7

40.0

40.1

3510

3510

3510

88

88

88

2.95

2.92

2.92

0.94

0.94

0.93

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T832 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.24

0.28

0.58

1.00

1.00

1.00

65.7

66.3

66.5

6000

6000

6000

91

90

90

1.52

1.51

1.50

0.97

0.97

0.96

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T832 C UNV 2 17 277

240

120

0.28

0.31

0.67

1.17

1.17

1.17

75.4

76.5

76.9

7020

7020

7020

93

92

91

1.55

1.53

1.52

0.99

0.98

0.97

3

3

3

G

G

G

H3D T832 G UNV 3 10 277

240

120

0.37

0.40

0.83

1.00

1.00

1.00

93.5

94.9

95.4

9000

9000

9000

96

96

96

1.07

1.05

1.05

1.03

1.01

1.01

3

3

3

G

G

G

H3D T832 G UNV 3 17 277

240

120

0.41

0.47

0.95

1.17

1.17

1.17

105.7

106.5

106.8

10,530

10,530

10,530

100

99

99

1.11

1.10

1.10

1.06

1.05

1.05

25 W

(36 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T825 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.11

0.12

0.25

1.00

1.00

1.00

29

29

30

1900

1900

1900

65

66

64

3.44

3.46

3.34

0.86

0.87

0.84

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T825 C UNV 1 17 277

240

120

0.12

0.14

0.29

1.17

1.17

1.17

34

33

34

2223

2223

2223

66

67

66

3.49

3.53

3.46

0.87

0.88

0.87

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T825 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.22

0.24

0.49

1.00

1.00

1.00

56

56

59

3800

3800

3800

68

68

64

1.79

1.79

1.69

0.89

0.89

0.85

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T825 C UNV 2 17 277

240

120

0.24

0.27

0.55

1.17

1.17

1.17

62

62

64

4446

4446

4446

71

72

69

1.88

1.89

1.83

0.94

0.95

0.91

17 W

(24 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T817 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.08

0.09

0.19

1.00

1.00

1.00

23

23

23

1300

1300

1300

57

58

57

4.37

4.42

4.39

0.74

0.75

0.75

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T817 C UNV 1 17 277

240

120

0.09

0.10

0.20

1.17

1.17

1.17

25

25

26

1521

1521

1521

60

60

59

4.62

4.62

4.57

0.79

0.79

0.78

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T817 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.14

0.16

0.32

1.00

1.00

1.00

39

38

39

2600

2600

2600

67

68

66

2.58

2.60

2.56

0.88

0.89

0.87

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T817 C UNV 2 17 277

240

120

0.15

0.18

0.36

1.17

1.17

1.17

42

42

43

3042

3042

3042

73

73

71

2.80

2.81

2.71

0.95

0.95

0.92

* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 4 06.11.09

Hi-lume 3D Ballasts for Linear T5 Lamps

Lamp Type

Lamp Watts (length)

Lamps per Ballast

Case Size

Hi-lume 3D Input Voltage (VAC)

Ballast Current (A)

Ballast Factor (BF)

Input Power (W)

System Lumens* (lm)

System Efficacy* (lm/W)

Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF)

Relative System Efficacy (RSE)

T5 Linear

28 W

(45.2 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T528 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.12

0.13

0.27

1.0

1.0

1.0

32.1

32.2

32.5

2900

2900

2900

89

88

88

3.07

3.04

3.04

0.86

0.85

0.85

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T528 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.23

0.26

0.54

1.0

1.0

1.0

64.1

64.0

65.0

5800

5800

5800

90

89

89

1.55

1.54

1.53

0.87

0.86

0.86

21 W

(33.4 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T521 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.09

0.10

0.22

1.0

1.0

1.0

25.2

24.9

25.8

2100

2100

2100

83

84

81

3.97

4.02

3.88

0.83

0.84

0.81

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T521 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.18

0.20

0.41

1.0

1.0

1.0

48.6

47.9

49.2

4200

4200

4200

86

88

85

2.06

2.09

2.03

0.86

0.88

0.85

14 W

(21.6 in)

1

1

1

C

C

C

H3D T514 C UNV 1 10 277

240

120

0.07

0.08

0.16

1.0

1.0

1.0

19.1

18.5

18.8

1350

1350

1350

71

73

72

5.24

5.41

5.32

0.73

0.76

0.74

2

2

2

C

C

C

H3D T514 C UNV 2 10 277

240

120

0.13

0.15

0.29

1.0

1.0

1.0

35.4

35.2

35.3

2700

2700

2700

76

77

76

2.82

2.84

2.83

0.79

0.80

0.79

* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 5 06.11.09

Case Dimensions

CA 18.00 in (457 mm)

B 17.68 in (449 mm)

(mounting centers)

C 1.0 in (25 mm)

D 1.18 in (30 mm)

G

A 9.5 in (241 mm)

B 8.9 in (226 mm)

(mounting centers)

C 7.1 in (180 mm)

D 1.0 in (25 mm)

E 2.38 in (60 mm)

AB

CD

E

AB

C

D

AB

C

D




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 6 06.11.09

Hi-lume 3D Dimmer Wiring


WARNING: Risk of electric shock. Disconnect power before servicing or

installing.



• Wire as shown

Line input: Connects to:Hot Dimmer Black Wire


Dimmer wire: Connects to:Yellow Ballast Orange (DH)



Green Earth Ground

• Hi-lume 3D ballast line voltage and 3-wire input

terminals only accept one 18 AWG solid wire


• Ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer should not

be used for emergency/egress lighting unless an

external emergency ballast is used in the fixture.

See Lutron App. Note #50.

• Ballasts may be used for emergency/egress light-

ing when controlled by a Lutron dimming panel (GP)

and the panel is a dedicated emergency panel.

E1E2

NEU LINE

HOTDH

Class 2Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

Class 2Bus

LUTRON

LINE

Hot /

Black

3-Wire Dimmer

Ground

Green

GroundRed

Yellow

White

Ora

ng

e

Bla

ck

White

Neutral




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 7 06.11.09

Hi-lume 3D Wiring Diagrams

EcoSystem® Bus Overview



system

• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital ballasts,

32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors, and

64 wallstations or IR receivers

• Sensors do not directly connect to Hi-lume 3D ballasts

• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity insensitive

and can be wired in any topology



• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by using

the EcoSystem Programmer, GRAFIK Eye® QS with

EcoSystem, or Quantum®



18 AWG solid wire









practices

Notes





Wire Gauge Bus Length (max)12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)

14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)

16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

Class 2Bus

E1E2

NEU

HOTDH

Class 2Bus

LINELINE

Ballast Terminals

Ballast Terminals

To the EcoSystem

Bus Supply & up to

64 total ballasts




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 8 06.11.09

Wiring to One Lamp (C case shown)

NOTICE


• Wire colors shown are labeled on the ballast, but may vary depending upon fixture construction

BLUBLU

REDRED

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

N/CN/C

BLUBLU

REDRED

YELYEL

B/WB/W

Blue

Red

Wiring to Two Lamps (C case shown)



Blue

Yellow

Red

Blue

Yellow

Red

Blue

Yellow

Red

Striped




Type:

P10-68755


Job Name:

Job Number:

Model Numbers:


Hi-lume 3D 9 06.11.09

ATTENTION FACILITIES MANAGERS

PERFORMANCE

Lamp Seasoning


lamp seasoning prior to dimming.

SERVICE

Replacement Parts

Use replacement parts with exact Lutron model

numbers. Consult Lutron if you have any questions.

Further Information

For further information, please visit us at

www.lutron.com/ballasts or contact our 24-hour

Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466.

ATTENTION ELECTRICIANS AND CONTRACTORS



7 ft. (2 m) for T5 and T8 linear lamps.

Lamp Sockets



Lamp Mounting

Many fluorescent lamp sockets are available with

mounting slots to vary the height of the lamp away

from the grounded metal surface. Use these slots

to get the lamp glass to be 1/2 in. ± 1/4 in. away

from the grounded metal surface for T8 lamps and

3/8 in. ± 1/8 in. for T5 lamps.

Having a fluorescent lamp too close to the grounded

metal will make the minimum intensity too low and

will reduce lamp life. Having a fluorescent lamp too

far away from the grounded metal will make the

lamp flicker or not turn on at all.

Ballast Operating Temperature

Ballast case temperature must not exceed 75 °C at

any point on ballast.

Wiring and Grounding

Ballast and lighting fixture must be effectively

grounded. Ballasts must be installed per national

and local electrical codes.



Catalog Number:LS-B1_502DR0-DIM

Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

C-SERIES

1. 866. 825. 5420

www.albeotech.com

rev. 7.16.09

Industrial Strength LED Lighting

TM

Heavy Duty LED Linear Suspended

Robust and Innovative Construction Albeo’s TEMPRTM thermal management technology transfers heat from the LED into the rugged aluminum housing, reducing junction temperature for more light and longer life.

Optical Advantage Brightest and highest efficacy LEDs come in a wide range of colors for almost any application. Directional LEDs put more light where it’s needed, greatly increasing efficiency.

Superior Performance No flicker. No buzzing. Low power consumption. –10 to +110F operation.

Electrical System 120 or 277 VAC input. Robust magnetic transformer included. Dimming capabilities.

OptionsHigh value or brightness options provide solutions for a wide range of applications.

Easy Mounting Standard chain, cable, or rod suspended. Designed to be mounted individually or in continuous run.

WarrantyThe Linear fixture is guaranteed for five years, subject to Albeo’s standard terms and conditions.

Ordering Information

Part Number

Type Comment Albeo’s LED linear fixture provides an energy efficient, no maintenance alternative to traditional fluorescent strip lights. Ideal for office, commercial, industrial, and retail applications. Albeo’s patent-pending TEMPRTM Technology allows the LEDs to run cooler than fluorescent and last 5 to 10 times longer with no hazardous waste. One strip provides light comparable to a two lamp fluorescent fixture at 1/3 less power.

4.6 ”

7.0”

For more options or custom configurations, please contact sales.

LM-79Tested

1.9 ”

7.0”

PatentsPending

Not all combinations available.

LS 0

1

1 inch(bright)1.5 inch(value)

V

B

# of LED bars

ProductPlatform

LEDCCT

LEDPitch

4

5

6

5000°K

4200°K

3500°K

Model

0

M

V

None

MotionSensor

0-10V Dimming

LS V 1 1 1 0 0C5

InputVoltage Optics

120 V

277 V

1

2

Chain

Rod

C

R

Mounting Options

4

4

Length

4 ft1 bar

2 bars

1

2Linear Suspended

LEDLight Fixture

HighValue

High Brightness

Lens

No Lens

Narrow

Diffuser

0

1

N

D

Revision

Rx

Used to further define

product configuration

LS

B High Brightness

1 bar1

5 4200°K

0

1

1 inch(bright)1 5 i h 277 V2

DiffuserD

RodR

0 None

DIM-DIMMING

Length




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

C-SERIES

1. 866. 825. 5420

www.albeotech.com

rev. 7.16.09


TM


Optical and Electrical Specifications — 4ft versions

Photometry

The Albeo LED Suspended Strip fixture must be installed by a qualified electrician. It is the responsibility of the contractor, installer, purchaser, owner, and user to install, maintain, and operate the fixture in such a manner as to comply with all state and local laws, ordinances, regulations, and the American National Standards Institute Safety Code.

US Patents Pending

Specification subject to change without notice. See website for latest version.

Tested to LM-79 standards

All options not listed. Please contact sales for technical specs of other part numbers.

NarrowDistribution

StandardDistribution

Type Part Number Color Temp # of LEDs Lumens Watts Lumens/W

Value

LS-V144-1x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 30 2000 29 75 LS-V145-1x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 30 1800 29 67 LS-V144-1x0xx-R3 Bright 5000 K 30 2360 36 71 LS-V145-1x0xx-R3 Cool 4200 K 30 2100 36 64

LS-V244-1x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 60 4000 58 69 LS-V245-1x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 60 3600 58 62

Bright

LS-B144-0x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 45 3000 44 75 LS-B145-0x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 45 2700 44 67 LS-B144-0x0xx-R5 Bright 5000 K 45 3550 54 71 LS-B145-0x0xx-R5 Cool 4200 K 45 3175 54 67

LS-B244-0x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 90 6000 87 75 LS-B245-0x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 90 5400 87 67


LS-B244-0x0xx-R5 Bright 5000 K 90 7075 108 71 LS-B245-0x0xx-R5 Cool 4200 K 90 6350 108 67

1-BAR VERSIONS

2-BAR VERSIONS

1-BAR VERSIONS

2-BAR VERSIONS

Length

4 ft 4 ft 4 ft 4 ft

4 ft 4 ft 4 ft 4 ft

4 ft 4 ft 4 ft 4 ft

4 ft 4 ft 4 ft 4 ft




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

C-SERIES

1. 866. 825. 5420

www.albeotech.com

rev. 7.16.09


TM


Robust and Innovative Construction Albeo’s TEMPRTM thermal management technology transfers heat from the LED into the rugged aluminum housing, reducing junction temperature for more light and longer life.

Optical Advantage Brightest and highest efficacy LEDs come in a wide range of colors for almost any application. Directional LEDs put more light where it’s needed, greatly increasing efficiency.

Superior Performance No flicker. No buzzing. Low power consumption. –10 to +110F operation.

Electrical System 120 or 277 VAC input. Robust magnetic transformer included. Dimming capabilities.

OptionsHigh value or brightness options provide solutions for a wide range of applications.

Easy Mounting Standard chain, cable, or rod suspended. Designed to be mounted individually or in continuous run.

WarrantyThe Linear fixture is guaranteed for five years, subject to Albeo’s standard terms and conditions.

Ordering Information

Part Number

Type Comment Albeo’s LED linear fixture provides an energy efficient, no maintenance alternative to traditional fluorescent strip lights. Ideal for office, commercial, industrial, and retail applications. Albeo’s patent-pending TEMPRTM Technology allows the LEDs to run cooler than fluorescent and last 5 to 10 times longer with no hazardous waste. One strip provides light comparable to a two lamp fluorescent fixture at 1/3 less power.

4.6 ”

7.0”

For more options or custom configurations, please contact sales.

LM-79Tested

1.9 ”

7.0”

PatentsPending

Not all combinations available.




Notes:

Type:

P10-68755

C-SERIES

1. 866. 825. 5420

www.albeotech.com

rev. 7.16.09


TM


Type Part Number Color Temp # of LEDs Lumens Watts Lumens/W

Value

LS-V184-1x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 60 4000 58 75 LS-V185-1x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 60 3600 58 67 LS-V184-1x0xx-R3 Bright 5000 K 60 4725 72 71 LS-V185-1x0xx-R3 Cool 4200 K 60 4225 72 64


Bright

LS-B184-0x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 90 6000 87 75 LS-B185-0x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 90 5400 87 67 LS-B184-0x0xx-R5 Bright 5000 K 90 7075 108 71 LS-B185-0x0xx-R5 Cool 4200 K 90 6350 108 67

LS-B284-0x0xx-R4 Bright 5000 K 180 12,000 175 75 LS-B285-0x0xx-R4 Cool 4200 K 180 10,800 175 67


LS-B284-0x0xx-R5 Bright 5000 K 180 14,150 216 71 LS-B285-0x0xx-R5 Cool 4200 K 180 12,700 216 67

1-BAR VERSIONS

2-BAR VERSIONS

1-BAR VERSIONS

2-BAR VERSIONS

Length

8 ft 8 ft 8 ft 8 ft

8 ft 8 ft 8 ft 8 ft

8 ft 8 ft 8 ft 8 ft

8 ft 8 ft 8 ft 8 ft

Optical and Electrical Specifications — 8ft versions

Photometry

The Albeo LED Suspended Strip fixture must be installed by a qualified electrician. It is the responsibility of the contractor, installer, purchaser, owner, and user to install, maintain, and operate the fixture in such a manner as to comply with all state and local laws, ordinances, regulations, and the American National Standards Institute Safety Code.

US Patents Pending

Specification subject to change without notice. See website for latest version.

Tested to LM-79 standards

All options not listed. Please contact sales for technical specs of other part numbers.

NarrowDistribution

StandardDistribution

K e y S e l e c t i o n A t t r i b u t e s Ty p i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s

• Conference rooms• Office• Retail and hospitality• Higher education• Healthcare

WOODWORKS™ Ekos®

Ekos Maple (MP)

Ekos Light Cherry (LC)

Ekos Dark Cherry (DC)

Ekos Mahogany (HG)

Wall Systems

Finish SelectionDue to printing limitations, shade may vary from actual product.

Perforation Option (Actual 1:1 scale shown)

Hole Size: 0.4mm [.015"]% Open Area: 5.7%

Type: Round-Staggered

WoodWorks Ekos Wall System Perforated in Ekos Dark Cherry with Aluminum Accent Trim

• No detectable VOC emissions• Panels can be installed horizontally

or vertically

• Rich, natural wood finishes• Less expensive and easier to install than

custom millwork• Standard system with variety of accessories• Can help contribute to LEED® credits with no-

added formaldehyde and high recycled content

Wall Systems

WOODWORKS™ Ekos®

A c o u s t i c a l B e n e f i t s

• Perforated Ekos panels absorb 50% of sound striking the surface• Improves sound quality and reduces reverberation within a space• STC levels increase as both perforated and unperforated Ekos panels are

added to standard drywall partitions• Reduces sound intrusion between spaces and increases speech privacy

Industry’s first wood wall system with:• Construction Waste Management, recyclable option through Armstrong

Recycling Program, LEED® MR Credit 2.1-2• 78% Recycled Content, LEED MR Credit 4.1-2• Regional Materials, LEED MR Credit 5.1-2• 8.9% Rapidly Renewable Materials, LEED MR Credit 6.0• Enhanced Acoustical Performance, LEED for Schools EQ Credit 9• Low Emitting Materials, no detectable formaldehyde, CHPS listing, LEED

for Schools EQ Credit 4-Option 6

• Decorative solid wood trims, corners, chair rails and moldings complement Ekos panel finishes• Aluminum trims add an eclectic edge• Consult WoodWorks Ekos brochure (CS-3826) for more accessory photos

S u s t a i n a b l e D e s i g n *

V e r s a t i l e A c c e s s o r i e s

* For more information on how Ekos Wall Systems meet sustainable design requirements, see ArmstrongWall Systems Formaldehyde sheet (CS-3839) and Wall Systems Sustainable Design sheet (CS-3840)or visit armstrong.com/walls

Wood back veneer, unstained

Veneer edge banding on all sides

Kerfed on long sides for spline installation system

No-added urea-formaldehyde adhesive

Perforated mineral fiber substrate

No-solvent coatings (face and back)

Wood face veneer, stained finish

Maple 6" Base Molding Dark Cherry Peak CornerAluminum Reveal Accent Trim inNatural Anodized

Dark Cherry Chair Rail with Black Rail Insert

5/8" drywall onDesign 5/8" drywall on 3-5/8" metal studs

3-5/8" metal studs with R-11 Fiberglassinsulation in cavity

Standard STC 38 STC 44drywallonly

One wall STC 43 STC 52with Ekos

Both walls STC 46 STC 52with Ekos

Mahogany Finish Molding and Bullnose Accent Trim with perforated panels

Ekos Mahogany Perforated (magnified view – 5% open area per panel)

STC Ratings for Ekos added to Drywall

Panel MaterialMineral fiber with real wood veneers. Face veneers arequarter-cut, random-matched Anegre or Makore veneersstained to the Ekos finishes.

Panel Surface FinishTinted, no-solvent coatings on face veneers.

Accessory MaterialMilled solid wood stained to coordinate with Ekos finishes. Extruded aluminum.

Fire Performance Class B fire performance per IBC. Flame spread Ratingof 50 or less and Smoke Developed Classification of 100or less when tested per ASTM E84 or CAN/ULC S 102.

Panel Weight1.6 lbs/SF

WarrantyOne (1) year limited warrantyDetails: armstrong.com/warranty

Application ConsiderationsDue to the natural characteristics of veneers, variationsin color and grain can be expected. Do not mix panelsfrom different lots. Veneered panels may also darkenover time.

It is very important that WoodWorks Ekos panels are climatized prior to installation. Relative humidity between25% and 55% and temperatures between 50º F and 86º Fmust be maintained.

Ekos wall panels are not recommended for use in high-traffic or high-impact areas. For these areas, contact Architectural Specialties at 1 877 ARMSTRONGand select options 1-1-4 to explore WoodWorks Custom wall systems.

Ekos wall panels may be installed horizontally. For more details, see installation instructions atarmstrong.com/ekos.

Acoustics RecyclingNRC Rating Acoustics VOC Program

Ekos A D STC Rating Formal-Item Number� Description Dimensions Pcs/Ctn [#] Finishes [F*] Mounting 1 wall 2 walls dehyde

Unperforated Vertical Panels

5800_ _ _ 8' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesUnperforated

5801_ _ _ 9' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesUnperforated

5802_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Vertical 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesWall Panel Unperforated

Perforated Vertical Panels5803_ _ _ 8' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes

Perforated

5804_ _ _ 9' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added YesPerforated

5805_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Vertical 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added YesWall Panel Perforated

Unperforated Horizontal Panels

5970_ _ _ 8' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesUnperforated

5971_ _ _ 9' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesUnperforated

5972_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Horizontal 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added YesWall Panel Unperforated

Perforated Horizontal Panels5973_ _ _ 8' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes

Perforated

5974_ _ _ 9' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added YesPerforated

5975_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Horizontal 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added YesWall Panel Perforated

� When specifying or ordering, please include pieces/ctn and color suffix. EXAMPLE: 58054HG = 4 nominal 10' perforated vertical panels in Ekos Mahogany finish NOTE: When wall panels are selected, you must also select Wall Installation Splines

V i s u a l S e l e c t i o n

P h y s i c a l D a t a

LEED® CreditsEnergy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Daylight

Mgmt Content Materials Materials & Views

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔Location Dependent


✔ ✔

LEED for Schools


Wall Systems

WOODWORKS™ Ekos®

Ekos Maple (MP)

Ekos Light Cherry (LC)

Ekos Dark Cherry (DC)

Ekos Mahogany (HG)

Colors

armstrong.com/greengenie


armstrong.com/ekosCS-3842-509

Wall Systems

WOODWORKS™ Ekos®

Chair Rail Accessories586_[F*]

5861_ _ Mounting Rail 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood

5863_ _ Rail Insert 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, BL, XX * Solid Wood

5963NA Rail Insert – 8'- 0" NA Solid WoodAluminum Finish and Aluminum

5864_ _ Rail Cap 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood

5866_ _ Easel Ledge 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood

* Insert two-letter color suffix for all Chair Rail item orders, except 5963NA. EXAMPLE: 5861HG – Mounting Rail in MahoganyNOTE: XX is unfinished wood, which can be field-painted.

Moldings585_[F*]

5855_ _ 4 Base Molding 8'- 4" [08] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5856_ _ 6 Base Molding 8'- 4" [08] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5857[##][F*]

5857_ _ _ _ Finish Molding 8'- 4" [08], 9'- 4" [09] or 10'- 2" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5867_ _ Inside Corner Molding 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX* Solid Wood

EXAMPLE: 5855HG – 4" Base Molding in MahoganyEXAMPLE: 585710HG – Nominal 10' Finish Molding in Mahogany

LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council

© AWI Licensing Company, 2009 • Printed in the United States of America

Decorative Corners and Splines

585_[##][F*]

5851_ _ _ _ Peak Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5852_ _ _ _ Bullnose Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5853_ _ _ _ Reverse Bead Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5854_ _ _ _ Chamfered Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5859[##][M]

5859_ _ _ Corner Installation Spline (concealed) 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X] or Aluminum [Y]

NOTE: When a Decorative Corner is selected, you must also choose a Corner Installation SplineEXAMPLES: 585109DC – 9' Decorative Corner in Dark Cherry; 585909X – 9' Corner Installation Spline in Plastic

Item Number Description Lengths [##] Finishes [F*] Material [M]

Decorative Accent Trims and Splines

5850_[##][F*]

5850A_ _ _ _ Peak Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5850B_ _ _ _ Bullnose Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5850C_ _ _ _ Reverse Bead Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5850D_ _ _ _ Bead Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood

5850J_ _ _ _ Cap Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] NA or BL* Aluminum

5850K_ _ _ _ Reveal Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] NA or BL* Aluminum

5858[##][M]

5858_ _ _ Wall Installation Spline (concealed) 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X] or Aluminum [Y]

5860[##][M]

5860_ _ _ Wall Bead Installation Spline † 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X]

* Aluminum Accent Trims available in Natural Anodized (NA) or Black Anodized (BL) finishes† This accessory should be used when Decorative Accent Trims are not selected.

NOTE: When a Decorative Accent Trim is selected, you must also choose a Wall Installation Spline. EXAMPLES: 5850K08BL – 8' Reveal Accent Trim in Black Anodized; 585808Y – 8' Wall Installation Spline in Aluminum

A c c e s s o r i e s

SECTION I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATIONProduct Name: Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems

SECTION II. ENVIRONMENTAL POLICYOur overall goal is to make sure our activities as acorporation are in harmony with the natural worldaround us.The Armstrong policy on the environment embodiesthese aims:1. To exercise care in the selection, use and conservation

of energy and raw materials, especially naturalresources, to assure that we are not wasting suchresources.

2. To make use of research and production technology toprovide for the environmental safety in workplaces andcommunities and to seek to reduce risk to the earth, itswaters and atmosphere.

3. To be prepared for emergencies and to act promptlyand responsibly to protect people and the environmentshould accidents or incidents occur.

4. To make products that are environmentally safe in theirintended use by our customers and consumers, and to accompany them with adequate information for their proper use, maintenance and disposal.

5. To reduce waste, to make use of recycling in all ouroperations, and to take care that we dispose of unneededmaterials in an environmentally appropriate manner.

SECTION III.This credit summary is an overview of ArmstrongWoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contributions to theLEED® Rating System. The credits apply to LEED for New Construction (LEED-NC), LEED for Existing Buildings (LEED-EB), LEED for Commercial Interiors(LEED-CI) and LEED for Schools. For more information,visit armstrong.com/ekos.

Armstrong WoodWorks™ Ekos® Wall Systems LEED® Credit Summary

MR Credit 2.1, 2.2 –CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT –(Divert 50% & 75% fromdisposal)

Intent: Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from disposal in landfillsand incinerators. Redirect recovered resources back to the manufacturing process.Redirect reusable materials to the appropriate sites.

Requirements: Recycle and/or salvage at least 50% or 75% (by weight or volume) of non-hazardous construction and demolition debris. Develop and implement aconstruction waste management plan quantifying material diversion goals.

Armstrong is the first ceiling manufacturer with a closed-loop recycling program which redirectsrecovered ceilings back to the manufacturing process. Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos WallSystems are integrated into this program. Please contact your Armstrong representative or ourRecycling Center at 1-877-276-7876 (Option 1-8) for more details on how this program canhelp you meet this requirement. Walls or Ceilings must be combined with other items toachieve this credit.

MATERIAL ANDRESOURCES

MR Credit 4.1, 4.2 –RECYCLED CONTENT (10% & 20% post-consumer + 1/2 pre-consumer)

Intent: Increase the demand for building products that incorporate recycled contentmaterials, thereby reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virginmaterials.

Requirements: Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of the post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer (post-industrial)content constitutes at least 10% or 20% of the total value of the materials in the project.

Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contain 78% recycled content. See chart atend for details. TechLine can supply the appropriate documentation needed for your LEEDsubmittal packet. For a more immediate response, be sure to access our Green Genie™ toolat armstrong.com/greengenie. Armstrong products must be aggregated with all otherrecycled content materials in order to achieve this credit.

WALL SYSTEMS

3840 SustainableDesign_1008:CS-3460A SustainableDesign_3 11/4/08 1:17 PM Page 1

MR Credit 5.1, 5.2 –REGIONAL MATERIALS

LEED NC – 10% Extracted,Processed & ManufacturedRegionallyLEED CI – 20% ManufacturedRegionally

Intent: Increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted andmanufactured within the region, thereby supporting the use of indigenous resources andreducing the environmental impacts resulting from transportation.

Requirements: LEED NC– Use building products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for minimum of10% or 20% (based on cost) of the total materials value. If only a fraction of the product is extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage(by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.

LEED CI– Use a minimum of 20% of all construction and Division 12 (furniture) materialsand products that are manufactured regionally within a radius of 500 miles.

Contact TechLine to get regional materials documentation for these products for LEED MRCredits 5.1 and 5.2. For a more immediate response, be sure to access our Green Genie toolat armstrongcom/greengenie.

MR Credit 6.0 – RAPIDLYRENEWABLE MATERIALS

Intent: LEED NC – Reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewable materials by replacing them with rapidly renewable materials.

LEED CI – Reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewablematerials by replacing them with rapidly renewable materials.

Requirements: LEED NC – Use rapidly renewable building materials and products (madefrom plants that are typically harvested within a ten-year cycle or shorter) for 2.5% of the totalvalue of all building materials and products used in the project, based on cost.

LEED CI – Use rapidly-renewable construction and Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings)materials and products, made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10-year orshorter cycle, for 5% of the total value of all materials and products used in the project.

Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contain 9% rapidly renewable content. See chart at end for details. Armstrong products must be aggregated with all other rapidly renewable content materials in order to achieve this credit.

2

EQ Credit 4.1 to 4.5 – LOW-EMITTINGMATERIALS

LEED NC – Composite Wood &Agrifiber Products

Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/orharmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants.

Requirements: All of the adhesives and sealants used in the building must meet therequirements of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.Interior paints and coating applied on-site must meet the limitations and restrictionsconcerning chemical components set by several standards. Carpets must meet the GreenLabel Plus testing and product requirements.

These credits pertain to adhesives & sealants, paints, carpets and composite wood.

Mineral Fiber Ceilings, Walls and Suspension Systems do not fit in any of the productcategories designated in this credit. Please note, however, that many of our products do meet the State of Washington and California Section 01350 requirements for low emissions.For additional information, refer to “Formaldehyde Emissions & Interior Spaces – What YouNeed To Know About Choosing Wood Wall Systems,” CS-3839. See the sustainabilitytable on the back page for emissions information.

Low emitting products can be used as a possible innovation credit.

INDOORENVIRONMENTALQUALITY

MATERIAL ANDRESOURCES (...cont.)


3

EQ Prerequisite 3

Intent: Provide classrooms that are quiet in which teachers can speak to the class without straining their voices and students can effectively communicate with each otherand the teacher.

Minimum Acoustical Performance is required. Design classrooms and other core learningspaces to meet the Reverberation Time (RT) requirements of ANSI Standard S12.60-2002(Annexes B-D 45 dBA). Also design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet theSound Transmission Class (STC) requirements of at least 35.

To learn more about the design guidelines for Classroom acoustics and ANSI S12.60 visit the Armstrong website armstrong.com/acoustics. The ANSI Standard S12.60 for ClassroomAcoustics addresses the issues of both reverberation time and background noise and their effecton speech intelligibility by placing maximum permissible levels on each. Armstrong hasdeveloped a simple reverberation tool to aid in your selection of materials to meet this credit. This interactive tool helps you calculate reverberation time and hear thedifference in five simple steps:

1. Describe the space

2. See recommended guidelines

3. Select surface materials. For ceilings, select a higher performance ceiling (high NRC).

4. The program will calculate the current reverberation time

5. Select treatment materials for your space to meet the reverberation recommendationand hear the difference, before and after!

OR Two Alternative Compliance Paths (PIEACP - Performance/Intent EquivalentAlternative Compliance Path)

The alternative compliance paths are not intended to replace any of the existing compliancepaths currently available. They offer alternatives to the current paths.

To Meet the Reverberation Time Requirement:

1. PATH 1 - Confirm that 100% of all standard classroom ceiling areas are finished with a material that has a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 or higher. This can typically be achieved with a lay-in acoustical ceiling tile or other acoustical finish material.

2. PATH 2 - Confirm that the conbined total area of acoustical wall panels, ceiling finishes, and other sound absorbent finishes equals or exceeds the total ceiling area of the room, and that all materials in the calculation have an NRC of 0.70 or higher.

Refer to the Sustainability Table on page 4 or Armstrong Product Catalog for a listing of NRCvalues for all of our ceiling and wall products. Many of our ceiling and wall products meet the required NRC values.

To Meet the Sound Transmission Requirement:

For sound transmission between core learning spaces and adjacent interior spaces –

Take measurements to limit the sound transmission between core learning spaces and theiradjacencies. Provide a narrative describing measures taken to limit sound transmissionbetween core learning spaces and adjacencies. Address the following: Wall constructions,interior glazing assemblies, door construction, partition construction. Also limit noisetransmission through sound paths including open plenums above core learning spaces,connecting doors between core learning spaces, ceiling air return grilles into open plenums,cross talk via mechanical ductwork.

Refer to the Sustainability Table or Armstrong Product Catalog for a listing of CAC and STCvalues for all of our ceiling and wall products. For open plenum designs, refer to our selectionof canopies and clouds.

LEED FOR SCHOOLS

EQ Credit 9 –ENHANCED ACOUSTICALPERFORMANCE

Use the same guidelines in EQ Prerequisite 3. Meet a lower RT time (40dBA - 1 pt.; 35 dBA -2 pts.) Exemplary acoustical performance may qualify for an Innovation & Design credit.

To learn more about the design guidelines for Classroom Acoustics and ANSI S12.60 visit the Armstrong website www.armstrong.com/acoustics.

EQ Credit 4 – Option 6LOW-EMITTINGMATERIALS

LEED Requirements: All acoustical ceiling systems and wall coverings must meet CA Dept. of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of VOC Emissions.

Armstrong Ceiling and Wall Systems Contribution:Many Armstrong mineral fiber ceiling and wall systems will meet the low-emitting materialsrequirement for Ceiling and Wall Systems, and are listed on the CHPS Low-Emitting Materialslist. See the Sustainability Table on page 4 for Ekos specific product information.


CS-3840–1108 © AWI Licensing Company, 2008

LEED for SchoolsEnvironmental

QualityUSGBC Material and Resources LEED for Schools EQ Prerequisite 3

LEED Credits MR 2.1 & 2.2, MR 4.1 & 4.2, MR 5.1 & 5.2, MR 6 EQ 4 Option 6 and Credit 9

Total Total Total No-Added VOC MeetsArmstrong Recycling Recycled Pre- Post- Regional Rapidly Urea- 01350*Wall Product Program Content Consumer Consumer Materials Renewable Formaldehyde CHPS Listed NRC STC**

Ekos Perforated ✔ 78% 77% 1% Verify through 9% ✔ ✔ 0.45 38-52Wall Panels TechLine or

Green Genie

Ekos Unperforated ✔ 78% 77% 1% Verify through 9% ✔ ✔ NA 38-52Wall Panels TechLine or

Green Genie

* VOC - Please refer to "The Basics of Formaldehyde When Choosing Wood Wall Systems" (CS-3839) for more details.These products meet Section 01350 CA and "Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)." Contact Armstrong TechLine for more information.

** Depends on installation method

Sustainability Table

Contact TechLineSM for further information – 8 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. EST, Monday through Friday FAX 1-800-572-8324 or email: [email protected]

armstrong.com/ekos

100%

Cert. no. SW-COC-003961

Printed on recyclable paperwith vegetable-based inks. Please Recycle.

Green Genie™ – Search, evaluate and document which Armstrong Ceiling or Wall product meets the environmental criteria needed for your project at armstrong.com/greengenie


Effective Date: 01-Nov-03 Page 1 of 1 Revision Date: 10-Sept-04 Revision #: 02

4506 52nd Ave S.E. Calgary, Alberta T2C 4N7 Toll Free: (800) 640-3709

Phone: (403) 236-1333 Fax: (403) 236-1373

Email: [email protected]

Digital Artwork Requirements General

• Include a hardcopy of your digital file(s) to ensure we have an accurate representation of your artwork.

• Convert all fonts to paths/outlines/curves to avoid font substitutions. If this is not possible, include or embed all fonts. Converting fonts is recommended to avoid delays and font copyright infringement.

• Avoid all forms of compression in raster files. (Tiff, bmp, gif, all jpeg) Format - Vector

• Art Work made from fills and outlines, with fonts converted to curves. • Corel Draw 13 or lower, Adobe Illustrator, EPS • Auto Cad – Not recommended for graphics artwork but acceptable for Elevation details. Include

hard copies and final cut list. Please delete all non glass related information. File format - Raster

• Adobe Photo Shop (Preferred) –PSD and TIF (no image compression). • Avoid all forms of image compression in raster files. (Tiff, bmp, gif, all jpeg)

Media Transfer Format

• CD Rom – DVD Rom. • Email file to your salesperson - no size limit. • Please label all disks with file names, programs and version #’s used. Include a contact name and

phone number for any media related questions we may have.

��

-�9��

.��,��-��

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�

+��

:��.�( :�� .�

,�04:�4 ,.� .*�,. ��(��

��

+��

�+��.��,

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�

��.0(��

�+��(-�� +2�� +2��,,��

�+��*�

��.0(��

�+�/��+* �+�1�� +��.**� �+�2��,**�4��-�

�+�3��0�� +�5��.0 �+� ��8-��;� �+�6��.��.0�+� ��:��

�+�5��.�� +�2��.*-�

�+�3��.��

��

+��

�+1��,��

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�

��,��

�+1��.�*-� �+1��:��

�+12��.��

��.��

�+15��(-�� +1 ��**( �+16��.��

�+1/��:�+11��;�

��*��

��

9��

,�(��

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�

+��<�/

�� '�� #�!��!=��>!�!��#$��$��?��$�&� #�� !��'�!�$@�,�A #B� ��!�C�� $�� #B�"�#�C�� #B�#$��!�C�� C��#$��!��!�!��$��#��#$��D��$��!��CC�B�!! #B��C��#!�� #� !�C # !��$@

��*�0

��(��*:��-�

��:��-� *E�.��4 �*+:**�

�:��.��4 � ��:0�:��-�

:��*�0

+��1�<��

��(��*�*�0 ��0�*�0 ��.� ��+-��+��

+-��+��

��+��

,**��*�0 *��*�0

,�0�:��-�

��

(*:��.*��

�(�1��*��

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�

��


�(�/�*+ �(��.��4 �(��(�� (�/�� (�1��.0

�(��*�* �(�3�.�� (�5�.�� (��:�� (2��,,��

�(2��

�(�2��.*-�

��

*��

�� !�"�� !� �!��#��$!%�&��!��#�� !�� '�� #�(��#��$��!�"&��

��)��*�+��+��,�


;((��<��,�

��9�� .��.*�� .0

Electrical:Input voltage: 110-120V AC, single phase 60 HzRated power: 1400W, 12.0AMotor type: Dyson Digital Motor. switched reluctance brushlessMotor speed: 81,000 rpmHeater type: None Standby power consumption: 1wEnergy consumption per dry: .00468kwh

Construction:Die-cast aluminum casing with anti-microbial scuff resistantlacquer coating on exterior surfacesColor finish: Metallic silver, gloss lacquer Anti-microbially integrated external plastics and sealsPressed anti-rust steel backplateTamper-proof T30 type exterior screws Water ingress protection to IPX5

Filtration:HEPA filter with anti-microbial coating 99.97% particulate efficiency <99.9% bacteria removal.

Operation:Touch-free infra-red activationHand dry time: 12 seconds(measured to method defined in National Sanitation Foundation protocol P335) Airspeed at nozzle: 400mphOperating airflow: 68cfmRated operating noise power: 84db(A)

Logistics:Single unit order code: 13043-01Unit weight: 32lbPackaged weight: 39lbPackaged dimensions: 29.1” × 14.3” × 12.2”Pallet Count: 13Pallet Type: USUnit Barcode: 879957001275

Standard warranty:5 year parts, 1 year labor limited

Product CertificationETL listed in accordance with UL507

Recommended height from floor Male Female Child/Disabled

x To top of machine 41.25” 38.25” 34.25”

y To mounting bracket screw 39” 36” 32”

z To bottom of machine 16” 13” 9”

For further information please contact Dyson on: 1-888-DYSON-AB or visit our website at www.dysonairblade.com

TESTED. CERTIFIED. HYGIENIC.

The fastest, most hygienic hand dryer.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

10”

2”

9.3”

13.7”

25.25”

2”

10.6”

0.2”

2.4”

12”6” 0.2”

x

y

z

See table for recommended

mounting height

Mounting bracket

Mounting locations

AB02

10”

2”

9.3”

13.7”

25.25”

2”

10.6”

0.2”

2.4”

12”6” 0.2”

xy

z*See table for

recommended mounting height

Mounting bracket

Mountinglocations (4)

REAR VIEW

SIDE VIEW

All dimensions shown in inches

23.10”25.25”

4”6.5”

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION208V

US0

9025

02

.26.

09

©20

09 D

yson

ElectricalElectrical supply: 208 V AC, 3 phase 60 HzRated power: 1600 WMotor type: Dyson digital motor. Switched reluctance brushlessMotor speed: 88,000 rpmHeater type: None Standby power consumption: 1 WEnergy consumption per dry: 0.0044 kWh

ConstructionDie-cast aluminum casing with anti-microbial scuff resistant lacquer coating on exterior surfacesColor finish: Metallic silver, gloss lacquer Anti-microbially integrated external plastics, seals and air ductsPressed anti-rust steel back plate / mounting bracketTamper-proof T30 type exterior screws Water ingress protection to IPX5

FiltrationHEPA filter with anti-microbial coating99.97% particulate efficiency < 99.9% bacterial removal

OperationTouch-free infra-red activationHand dry time: 10 seconds (measured to method defined by National Sanitation Foundation protocol P.335) Airspeed output: 400 mphOperating airflow: 74 CFMRated operating noise power: 85 dB(A)

LogisticsSerial number prefix: A02Single unit order code: 14645-01Unit weight: 32 lbPackaged weight: 39 lbPackaged dimensions: 29.1” × 14.3” × 12.2” Pallet count: 13Pallet type: USUnit barcode: 879957001848

Standard warranty5 year parts, 1 year labor limited

Product CertificationETL listed in accordance with UL 507 ADA Compliant

*Recommended installation Male Female Child or heights measured from floor Disabledx To top of machine 41.25” 38.25” 34.25”y To mounting bracket screw 39.0” 36.0” 32.0”z To bottom of machine 16.0” 13.0” 9.0”

Manufactured materialsPlastic: ABS, polyurethane, polypropylene, BMC, PTFERubber: Styrene, butadiene, EPDMMetal: Die cast aluminium, steel, copper, zinc, ferrite coresOther: Powder coat, lacquer, glass, glass paper, synthetic fiber fleece, hotmelt glass wool adhesive

For further information please contact Dyson at 1-888-DYSON-AB or email any questions to [email protected]

6.5”

9.7”

4”

3.1”

3.3” 3.3”

14.5

”

12.1”

1.8”

26.2

5”

24”

26.2

5”

2.25

”

0.2”

6”11.9”

0.2”

3.1”

1.4”

1.9”

11”

13.4

”

X

Y

Z

REAR VIEW

SIDE VIEW

All dimensions shown in inches

Mounting bracket

Electricalentrance

AB04

Mountinglocations (4) *See table for

recommended mounting height

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION120V

US0

9026

02

.26.

09

©20

09 D

yson

ElectricalElectrical supply: 110-120 V AC, single phase 60 HzRated power: 1400 WMotor type: Dyson digital motor. Switched reluctance brushlessMotor speed: 81,000 rpmHeater type: None Standby power consumption: 1 WEnergy consumption per dry: 0.00468 kWh

ConstructionPolycarbonate-ABS casing with homogenous anti-microbial additiveColor finish: Metallic steel finish PC-ABS Anti-microbially integrated external plastics, seals and air ductsGalvanized steel back plate / mounting bracketTamper-proof T30 type exterior screws Water ingress protection to IPX5

FiltrationHEPA filter with anti-microbial coating99.97% particulate efficiency < 99.9% bacterial removal

OperationTouch-free infra-red activationHand dry time: 12 seconds (measured to method defined by National Sanitation Foundation protocol P.335) Airspeed output: 400 mphOperating airflow: 68 CFMRated operating noise power: 85 dB(A)

LogisticsSerial number prefix: A04-USSingle unit order code: 14225-01Unit weight: 22 lbPackaged weight: 28.7 lbPackaged dimensions: 29.1” × 14.2” × 12.2” Pallet count: 13Pallet type: USUnit barcode: 879957002210

Standard warranty5 year parts, 1 year labor limited

Product CertificationETL listed in accordance with UL 507 ADA Compliant

*Recommended installation Male Female Child or heights measured from floor Disabledx To top of machine 41.25” 38.25” 34.25”y To mounting bracket screw 39.0” 36.0” 32.0”z To bottom of machine 15.0” 12.0” 8.0”

Manufactured materialsPlastic: ABS, PC/ABS, PC, PP (+ PPGF and PPTF), PET-TSThermoset (BMC/DMC), PEEK Rubber: Styrene, butadiene, EPDMMetal: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, zinc diecast alloy brass

For further information please contact Dyson at 1-888-DYSON-AB or email any questions to [email protected]

high

er th

an 2

7"68

5mm

4" max100mm

48"1220mm

48"

1220

mm

15" m

in38

1mm

DESIGN AND BUILD SPECIFICATION

Mobility access within washroom facilitiesThe Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) defines the accessible requirements for the design and construction of washroom spaces in the United States.* Detailed below are examples of the installation requirements for hand dryers. The Dyson Airblade™ hand dryer (AB02, AB04) has been designed to comply with these recommendations.

Clearance for wall-mounted protruding objects

Objects that protrude beyond 4” (100mm) from the wall must be mounted so that part of the object is below 27” (685mm) from the floor in order to overlap the cane detection range specified by ADA standards.

US0

9003

01

.14.

09

©20

09 D

yson

*Source: ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), Section 4. Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Requirements.

Forward reach:

Maximum high forward reach allowed shall be: 48” (1220mm) Minimum low forward reach allowed shall be: 15” (381mm)

Forward reach over an obstruction:

When the reach x is less than 20” (510mm) then the maximum height y shall be 48” (1220mm) maximum.

XLERATOR®

GREEN CERTIFICATIONS

the new standard for commercial facilities

®

One ton of paper productionpollutes 20,000 gallons of water.

Seventeen trees are consumed to make one ton of paper.

One ton of paper consumes three cubic yards of landfill.

Average cost of paper is 2 cents per hand dry using paper towels vs. 1/10th of a cent using dryers

LEED® (Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design)In March 2000, the U.S. Green Building Council formally released the LEED Green Building Rating System. Today, hundreds of public and private building projects in the United States and abroad use LEED as the standard for green building specifications. XLERATOR® helps facilities earn LEED credits in the following categories:

The Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED®) Green Building Rating System™ is a/the nationally accepted benchmark for the design, construction, and operations of high performance green build-ings. LEED was developed by the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC), a nonprofit working to transform the building industry to sustainable practices.

Environmental Building News – GreenSpec®

The leading newsletter on environmentally responsible design and construction since 1992, EBN is independently published and advertisement free. The research and reporting is uncompromised by corporate or industry sponsorships. EBN researchers independently tested XLERATOR for its performance and energy efficiency and determined that XLERATOR clearly outperforms conventional electric hand dryers, both in energy savings and dry time which is why XLERATOR is the first hand dryer to be GreenSpec Approved.

•VotedTopTenProductof2002bytheeditorsofEBN

GreenSpec - is a database of green products, specifications and practices for use by architects and construction professionals. This database Includes over 2,100 green building products carefully screened by the editors of Environmental Building News, organized according to the 16-division CSI MasterFormat™ system. The XLERATOR is listed in Division 10 28 00.

Green Building InitiativeExcel Dryer is a proud registered supporter of the Green Building Initiative. The mission of the Green Building Initiative is to accelerate the adoption of building practices that result in energy-efficient, healthier and environmentally sustainable buildings by promoting credible and practical green building approaches for residential and commercial construction.

EXCEL DRYER Inc.Toll free: 1.800.255.9235

Email: [email protected]

Website: www.exceldryer.com

Sustainable Buildings Industry CouncilExcel Dryer is a member of the Sustainable Buildings Industry Council. Since its incep-tion in 1980 SBIC has been a national leader in defining the whole building approach to design, which results in high performance buildings and favors sustainability as a prominent design objective. SBIC members and partners share the common goal of delivering buildings that provide long-term value and performance, reduce operating costs, keep occupants safe, comfortable and healthy, and protect the natu-ral environment.

Green Restaurant AssociationThe XLERATOR hand dryer is endorsed by the GRA as the best environmental solution in the hand dryer category for the restaurant industry.

Green Hotels AssociationExcel Dryer is an Ally Member and approved vendor of the Green Hotels Association. XLERATOR is the recommended hand dryer for green hotels.

Oikos Product DirectoryThe most comprehensive listing of products and services for energy-efficient, environmentally-responsible building construction. XLERATOR hand dryers are listed in the directory. www.oikos.com.

Good for the Environment

Do you know the facts?

•EA(Earth&Atmosphere)Prerequisite2-MinimumEnergyPerformance •EA(Earth&Atmosphere)Credit1-OptimizingEnergyPerformance (NowamandatorycreditforallLEEDFacilities)

Model XL-BWSurface-mounted, Automatic,White Thermoset (BMC) Cover

Model XL-CSurface-mounted, Automatic,

Chrome Plated Cover

Model XL-SBSurface-mounted, Automatic,Brushed Stainless Steel Cover

Model XL-GRSurface-mounted, Automatic,

Graphite Textured Painted Cover

Model XL-WSurface-mounted, Automatic,

White Epoxy Painted Cover

Suggested Mounting HeightsFrom floor to Bottom of Dryer

Hand DryersMens' 45" (114 cm)Ladies' 43" (109 cm)Teenagers' 41" (104 cm)Sm. Children 35" (89 cm)Handicapped 37" (94 cm)

Units are 1500 Watts and available as Specified in:

110/120V 12.5 Amp 60 Hz

208V 7.0 Amp 60 Hz

220/240 6.5 Amp 60 Hz

277V 5.5 Amp 60 Hz

220/240V 6.5 Amp 50 Hz

EXCEL DRYER Inc.357 Chestnut Street • P.O. Box 365East Longmeadow, MA 01028 U.S.A.Tel: (413) 525-4531, Fax: (413) 525-2853Email: [email protected]

www.exceldryer.com® 090910

XLERATOR® HAND DRYERCONSTRUCTIONA. Cover shall be one of the following: Die-cast zinc alloy - One-piece, heavy-duty, rib-reinforced, lightweight, unbreakable, rustproof and all exposed surfaces shall be bright chrome plated or finished with chip-proof, electrostatically applied epoxy paint. White thermoset (BMC) – Fiberglass re-enforced bulk molding compound. Stainless Steel – with a brushed finish. Special Image – Digital image applied to cover using patented KolorFusion Sublimation Decoration process. All covers will be fastened to a wall plate by two chrome plated tamper-proof bolts.

B. Wall plate shall be equipped with (3) 7/8" (22 mm) diameter holes, one of which shall be suitable for use with surface conduit, for ease of wiring.

C. All internal parts shall be coated according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements.

D. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded.

E. Optional RECESS KIT includes a wall box fabricated of 22 GA 18-8 type 304 stainless steel with #4 satin finish and a 16 GA 18-8 type 304 stainless steel dryer mounting plate. All welded construction. A stainless steel cable is connected to the dryer mounting plate to hold the dryer in position when servicing.

MECHANISMA. Motor shall be a thermally protected, series commutated through-flow discharge vacuum motor/blower (5/8 HP / 20,000 RPM) which provides air velocity of 16,000 LFM (linear feet per minute) at the air outlet and 14,000 LFM at the hands (4 inches [102 mm] below air outlet).

B. Heating element is constructed of Nichrome wire and mounted inside the blower housing, thereby being vandal proof. It shall be protected by an automatic resetting thermostat, which shall open whenever air flow is cut off and shall close when flow of air is resumed. It shall produce an air temperature of up to 135°F (57°C) at a 72°F (22°C) ambient room temperature at the hands (4 inches [102 mm] below air outlet).

C. Control assembly is activated by an infrared optical sensor located next to the air outlet. The dryer shall operate as long as hands are under the air outlet. There is a 35-second lockout feature if hands are not removed.

LIMITED WARRANTYThe dryer shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of five (5) years. Warranty shall include factory performed labor as well as the repair or exchange of defective parts, at manufacturer's option.

QUANTITY RECOMMENDATIONSOne dryer for every two washbasins is sufficient for most applications. If restroom traffic is unusually heavy, we suggest one dryer per washbasin in small installations and two dryers for every three washbasins in larger installations. When a 54" wash-fountain is used, we suggest four to five dryers.

RECESS KiT (optional)

Dimensions: 11 3/4" lg. X 12 11/16" high x 6 11/16" deep(298 mm lg. X 322 mm high x 170 mm deep)

Weight: XL-BW - 15 lbs. (6.80 kgs.) XL-SB 16 lbs. (7.26 kgs.)XL-W, XL-GR, XL-C, XL-SI - 17 lbs. (7.71 kgs.)

Dimensions: 16 3/8” wide x 26” high x 3 3/8” deep(416 mm wide x 660 mm high x 86 mm deep)

Weight: 11 lbs. (4.99 kgs.)Note: Bottom of recessed wall box should be 10 1/2” (27 cm) below suggested mounting height for dryer (see chart).

Printed on recycled paperPrinted in the U.S.A.

XLERATOR® HAND DRYERSPECIFICATIONS

*Note: Exclusive digital image technology allows for the addition of Company, School or Team logos with any color, design or a 'green message'

TIME TO THROW IN THE TOWEL.

Recess Kit - Meets ADA Protrusion Requirement of 4 inches (102 mm)

Model XL-SI*Surface-mounted, Automatic,Custom Special Image Cover